03.10.2014 Views

Recommended Standard of NTCIP 1209 v02.17 - Institute of ...

Recommended Standard of NTCIP 1209 v02.17 - Institute of ...

Recommended Standard of NTCIP 1209 v02.17 - Institute of ...

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

A <strong>Recommended</strong> <strong>Standard</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Joint Committee on the <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> version <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

National Transportation<br />

Communications for ITS Protocol<br />

Object Definitions for<br />

Transportation Sensor Systems (TSS)<br />

<strong>v02.17</strong> December 2010<br />

This is a draft pre-standard document, which is distributed for review and ballot purposes<br />

only. You may reproduce and distribute this document within your organization, but only<br />

for the purposes <strong>of</strong> and only to the extent necessary to facilitate review and ballot to<br />

AASHTO, ITE, or NEMA. Please ensure that all copies include this notice. This prestandard<br />

contains recommended information that is subject to approval. Use this<br />

information at your own risk.<br />

Published by<br />

American Association <strong>of</strong> State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)<br />

444 North Capitol Street, N.W., Suite 249<br />

Washington, D.C. 20001<br />

<strong>Institute</strong> <strong>of</strong> Transportation Engineers (ITE)<br />

1627 I (“Eye”) Street, N.W., Suite 600<br />

Washington, D.C. 20006<br />

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)<br />

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752<br />

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209-3801<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA. All rights reserved.<br />

filename <strong>1209</strong>v0217b RS.doc


NOTICES<br />

Copyright Notice<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v01 © 2005, and <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 © 2010, by the American Association <strong>of</strong> State Highway<br />

and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>of</strong> Transportation Engineers (ITE), and the National<br />

Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). All intellectual property rights, including, but not limited to,<br />

the rights <strong>of</strong> reproduction, translation, and display are reserved under the laws <strong>of</strong> the United States <strong>of</strong><br />

America, the Universal Copyright Convention, the Berne Convention, and the International and Pan<br />

American Copyright Conventions. Except as licensed or permitted, you may not copy these materials<br />

without prior written permission from AASHTO, ITE, or NEMA. Use <strong>of</strong> these materials does not give you<br />

any rights <strong>of</strong> ownership or claim <strong>of</strong> copyright in or to these materials.<br />

Visit www.ntcip.org for other copyright information, for instructions to request reprints <strong>of</strong> excerpts, and to<br />

request reproduction that is not granted below.<br />

PDF File License Agreement<br />

To the extent that these materials are distributed by AASHTO / ITE / NEMA in the form <strong>of</strong> an Adobe®<br />

Portable Document Format (PDF) electronic data file (the “PDF file”), AASHTO / ITE / NEMA authorizes<br />

each registered PDF file user to view, download, copy, or print the PDF file available from the authorized<br />

Web site, subject to the terms and conditions <strong>of</strong> this license agreement:<br />

a) you may download one copy <strong>of</strong> each PDF file for personal, noncommercial, and intraorganizational<br />

use only;<br />

b) ownership <strong>of</strong> the PDF file is not transferred to you; you are licensed to use the PDF file;<br />

c) you may make one more electronic copy <strong>of</strong> the PDF file, such as to a second hard drive or burn to a<br />

CD;<br />

d) you agree not to copy, distribute, or transfer the PDF file from that media to any other electronic<br />

media or device;<br />

e) you may print one paper copy <strong>of</strong> the PDF file;<br />

f) you may make one paper reproduction <strong>of</strong> the printed copy;<br />

g) any permitted copies <strong>of</strong> the PDF file must retain the copyright notice, and any other proprietary<br />

notices contained in the file;<br />

h) the PDF file license does not include: 1) resale <strong>of</strong> the PDF file or copies, 2) republishing the content<br />

in compendiums or anthologies, 3) publishing excerpts in commercial publications or works for hire,<br />

4) editing or modification <strong>of</strong> the PDF file except those portions as permitted, 5) posting on network<br />

servers or distribution by electronic mail or from electronic storage devices, and 6) translation to other<br />

languages or conversion to other electronic formats;<br />

i) other use <strong>of</strong> the PDF file and printed copy requires express, prior written consent.<br />

Data Dictionary and MIB Distribution Permission<br />

To the extent that these materials are distributed by AASHTO / ITE / NEMA in the form <strong>of</strong> a Data<br />

Dictionary (“DD”) or Management Information Base (“MIB”), AASHTO / ITE / NEMA extend the following<br />

permission:<br />

You may make or distribute unlimited copies, including derivative works, <strong>of</strong> the DD or MIB, including<br />

copies for commercial distribution, provided that:


a) each copy you make or distribute contains the citation “Derived from <strong>NTCIP</strong> 0000 [insert the standard<br />

number]. Used by permission <strong>of</strong> AASHTO / ITE / NEMA.”;<br />

b) the copies or derivative works are not made part <strong>of</strong> the standards publications or works <strong>of</strong>fered by<br />

other standards developing organizations or publishers or as works-for-hire not associated with<br />

commercial hardware or s<strong>of</strong>tware products intended for field implementation;<br />

c) use <strong>of</strong> the DD or MIB is restricted in that the syntax fields may be modified only to reflect a more<br />

restrictive subrange or enumerated values;<br />

d) the description field may be modified but only to the extent that: 1) only those bit values or<br />

enumerated values that are supported are listed; and 2) the more restrictive subrange is expressed.<br />

These materials are delivered “AS IS” without any warranties as to their use or performance.<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA and their suppliers do not warrant the performance or results you may<br />

obtain by using these materials. AASHTO / ITE / NEMA and their suppliers make no warranties,<br />

express or implied, as to noninfringement <strong>of</strong> third party rights, merchantability, or fitness for any<br />

particular purpose. In no event will AASHTO / ITE / NEMA or their suppliers be liable to you or any<br />

third party for any claim or for any consequential, incidental or special damages, including any<br />

lost pr<strong>of</strong>its or lost savings, arising from your reproduction or use <strong>of</strong> these materials, even if an<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA representative has been advised <strong>of</strong> the possibility <strong>of</strong> such damages.<br />

Some states or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation <strong>of</strong> incidental, consequential, or special<br />

damages, or the exclusion <strong>of</strong> implied warranties, so the above limitations may not apply to a given user.<br />

Use <strong>of</strong> these materials does not constitute an endorsement or affiliation by or between AASHTO, ITE, or<br />

NEMA and the user, the user’s company, or the products and services <strong>of</strong> the user’s company.<br />

If the user is unwilling to accept the foregoing restrictions, he or she should immediately return these<br />

materials.<br />

PRL and RTM Distribution Permission<br />

To the extent that these materials are distributed by AASHTO / ITE / NEMA in the form <strong>of</strong> a Pr<strong>of</strong>ile<br />

Requirements List (“PRL”) or a Requirements Traceability Matrix (“RTM”), AASHTO / ITE / NEMA extend<br />

the following permission:<br />

a) you may make or distribute unlimited copies, including derivative works <strong>of</strong> the PRL (then known as a<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>ile Implementation Conformance Statement (“PICS”)) or the RTM, provided that each copy you<br />

make or distribute contains the citation “Based on <strong>NTCIP</strong> 0000 [insert the standard number] PRL or<br />

RTM. Used by permission. Original text © AASHTO / ITE / NEMA.”;<br />

b) you may only modify the PRL or the RTM by adding: 1) text in the Project Requirements column,<br />

which is the only column that may be modified to show a product’s implementation or the projectspecific<br />

requirements; and/or 2) additional table columns or table rows that are clearly labeled as<br />

ADDITIONAL for project-unique or vendor-unique features; and<br />

c) if the PRL or RTM excerpt is made from an unapproved draft, add to the citation “PRL (or RTM)<br />

excerpted from a draft standard containing preliminary information that is subject to change.”<br />

This limited permission does not include reuse in works <strong>of</strong>fered by other standards developing<br />

organizations or publishers, and does not include reuse in works-for-hire, compendiums, or electronic<br />

storage devices that are not associated with procurement documents, or commercial hardware, or<br />

commercial s<strong>of</strong>tware products intended for field installation.<br />

A PICS is a Pr<strong>of</strong>ile Requirements List that is completed to indicate the features that are supported in an<br />

implementation. Visit www.ntcip.org for information on electronic copies <strong>of</strong> the MIBs, PRLs, and RTMs.


Content and Liability Disclaimer<br />

The information in this publication was considered technically sound by the consensus <strong>of</strong> persons<br />

engaged in the development and approval <strong>of</strong> the document at the time it was developed. Consensus<br />

does not necessarily mean that there is unanimous agreement among every person participating in the<br />

development <strong>of</strong> this document.<br />

AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA standards and guideline publications, <strong>of</strong> which the document contained herein<br />

is one, are developed through a voluntary consensus standards development process. This process<br />

brings together volunteers and/or seeks out the views <strong>of</strong> persons who have an interest in the topic<br />

covered by this publication. While AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA administer the process and establish rules<br />

to promote fairness in the development <strong>of</strong> consensus, they do not write the document and they do not<br />

independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy or completeness <strong>of</strong> any information or the soundness<br />

<strong>of</strong> any judgments contained in their standards and guideline publications.<br />

AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA disclaim liability for any personal injury, property, or other damages <strong>of</strong> any<br />

nature whatsoever, whether special, indirect, consequential, or compensatory, directly or indirectly<br />

resulting from the publication, use <strong>of</strong>, application, or reliance on this document. AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA<br />

disclaim and make no guaranty or warranty, express or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness <strong>of</strong><br />

any information published herein, and disclaims and makes no warranty that the information in this<br />

document will fulfill any <strong>of</strong> your particular purposes or needs. AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA do not undertake<br />

to guarantee the performance <strong>of</strong> any individual manufacturer or seller’s products or services by virtue <strong>of</strong><br />

this standard or guide.<br />

In publishing and making this document available, AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA are not undertaking to<br />

render pr<strong>of</strong>essional or other services for or on behalf <strong>of</strong> any person or entity, nor are AASHTO, ITE, and<br />

NEMA undertaking to perform any duty owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using this<br />

document should rely on his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice <strong>of</strong> a<br />

competent pr<strong>of</strong>essional in determining the exercise <strong>of</strong> reasonable care in any given circumstances.<br />

Information and other standards on the topic covered by this publication may be available from other<br />

sources, which the user may wish to consult for additional views or information not covered by this<br />

publication.<br />

AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA have no power, nor do they undertake to police or enforce compliance with the<br />

contents <strong>of</strong> this document. AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA do not certify, test, or inspect products, designs, or<br />

installations for safety or health purposes. Any certification or other statement <strong>of</strong> compliance with any<br />

health or safety-related information in this document shall not be attributable to AASHTO, ITE, or NEMA<br />

and is solely the responsibility <strong>of</strong> the certifier or maker <strong>of</strong> the statement.<br />

Trademark Notice<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> is a trademark <strong>of</strong> AASHTO / ITE / NEMA. All other marks mentioned in this standard are the<br />

trademarks <strong>of</strong> their respective owners.


NR Reference Status Tracking<br />

(to be deleted on publication)<br />

Reference<br />

Designation<br />

Title<br />

Type<br />

(Norm,<br />

Other)<br />

Status<br />

1103 v02 TMP Norm. Changed refs to 1103 v02. Apr 2009 =<br />

edited and RS sent to SDO ballot. June<br />

2010 = JA. Oct 2010 = published.<br />

1201 v03 GO Norm. <strong>1209</strong> v02 needs 1201 v03. Changed refs<br />

to 1201 v03. May 2010 = repl RS<br />

accepted by JC. May 2010 = out for SDO<br />

ballot. Dec 2010 = JA<br />

2301 v02 AP-STMF Norm. 2008 = RS; 2009 = out for ballot; 2010 =<br />

JA. Sept 2010 = Published<br />

8004 v02 SMI Other 2009 = out for ballot; June 2010 = JA;<br />

Aug 2010 = Published<br />

Pending<br />

Off HOLD<br />

Off HOLD<br />

May 2010<br />

Off HOLD<br />

Off HOLD<br />

Minor Version Configuration Management [in part, to be deleted on publication]<br />

minor<br />

version<br />

Date & Status<br />

Editor<br />

<strong>v02.17</strong>b RS 12/13-29/2010 pre-ballot consistency edits and PDF Schopp<br />

nav checking.<br />

<strong>v02.17</strong> RS JJ Review <strong>of</strong> AG/BS edits, and prep for Next Step Johnson<br />

v02.16 10/1/2010 edited front matter; checked NRs; Schopp; Goodwin<br />

Goodwin edits.<br />

v02.15 4/4/08; post acceptance and edits per JC. Boaz<br />

v02.14a 3/7/08; pRS


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page i<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 was prepared by the <strong>NTCIP</strong> Transportation Sensor Systems (TSS) Working Group,<br />

which is a subdivision <strong>of</strong> the Joint Committee on the <strong>NTCIP</strong>. The Joint Committee on the <strong>NTCIP</strong> is<br />

organized under a Memorandum <strong>of</strong> Understanding among the American Association <strong>of</strong> State Highway<br />

and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>of</strong> Transportation Engineers (ITE), and the National<br />

Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). The Joint Committee on the <strong>NTCIP</strong> consists <strong>of</strong> six<br />

representatives from each <strong>of</strong> the standards organizations, and provides guidance for <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

development.<br />

At the time that <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 was prepared, the following individuals were members <strong>of</strong> the <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

TSS Working Group:<br />

• Ralph Boaz (chair)<br />

• Terry Haukom<br />

• Kyle Irvin<br />

• Allen Jacobs<br />

• Peter Ragsdale<br />

• Lynne Randolph<br />

• Mike Robertson<br />

• Robert Ung<br />

• Keith Vennel<br />

• Jo Versavel<br />

In addition to the many volunteer efforts, recognition is also given to those organizations that supported<br />

the efforts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>NTCIP</strong> TSS Working Group by providing comments and resources, including:<br />

• U.S. Department <strong>of</strong> Transportation,<br />

Research and Innovative Technology<br />

Administration, ITS Joint Program Office<br />

• 3M Intelligent Transportation Systems<br />

• California Department <strong>of</strong> Transportation<br />

• Denver Regional Council <strong>of</strong> Governments<br />

• Eberle Design, Inc.<br />

• Electronic Integrated Systems, Inc.<br />

• Federal Highway Administration<br />

• Golden River Traffic, Ltd.<br />

• Harris County Traffic & Transportation<br />

Department<br />

• Image Sensing Systems, Inc.<br />

• Iteris Roadway Sensors<br />

• Los Angeles Department <strong>of</strong> Transportation<br />

• Minnesota Department <strong>of</strong> Transportation<br />

• Noblis<br />

• Ontario Ministry <strong>of</strong> Transportation<br />

• Peek Traffic Corp.<br />

• Pillar Consulting, Inc.<br />

• Quixote Traffic Corp.<br />

• Reno A&E, Inc.<br />

• Robert De Roche Consulting<br />

• Sciovid, Inc.<br />

• Southwest Research <strong>Institute</strong><br />

• Telvent Farradyne Inc.<br />

• Traficon, Inc.<br />

• U.S. Traffic Corp.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page ii<br />

FOREWORD<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 defines the Transportation Sensor System (TSS) data elements that are supported by<br />

the National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol (<strong>NTCIP</strong>). A TSS is defined as any system<br />

capable <strong>of</strong> detecting and communicating certain traffic parameters using <strong>NTCIP</strong>.<br />

The effort to develop <strong>NTCIP</strong> began with the 3-TS Transportation Management Systems and Associated<br />

Control Devices Section <strong>of</strong> the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Their original<br />

desire was to address a user need for extending the TS 2 standards for traffic control hardware to include<br />

standardized systems communication. Under the guidance <strong>of</strong> the Federal Highway Administration's<br />

(FHWA) <strong>NTCIP</strong> Steering Group, the NEMA effort was expanded to include the development <strong>of</strong><br />

communications standards for all transportation field devices that could be used in Intelligent<br />

Transportation Systems (ITS) networks.<br />

In September 1996, a formal agreement was reached among NEMA, ITE, and AASHTO to jointly<br />

develop, approve, and maintain <strong>NTCIP</strong> standards. Under guidance <strong>of</strong> a Joint AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

Committee on <strong>NTCIP</strong>, a Working Group was created to develop data element definitions for Advanced<br />

Systems Sensors. The first meeting <strong>of</strong> the Working Group was in August 1997. Discussions within the<br />

Working Group lead to renaming <strong>of</strong> the Working Group to Transportation Sensor Systems.<br />

The predecessor <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005, <strong>NTCIP</strong> Data Element Definitions for<br />

Transportation Sensor Systems, defined data elements in ASN.1 using the SNMP Object Type Macro for<br />

devices that sense the presence or similar characteristics <strong>of</strong> vehicles. These definitions are intended for<br />

detection devices that range from smart inductive loop amplifiers to technologies such as machine vision.<br />

For more information about <strong>NTCIP</strong> standards, visit the <strong>NTCIP</strong> Web Site at www.ntcip.org.<br />

User Comment Instructions<br />

The term “User Comment” includes any type <strong>of</strong> written inquiry, comment, question, or proposed revision,<br />

from an individual person or organization, about any part <strong>of</strong> this standards publication’s content. A<br />

“Request for Interpretation” <strong>of</strong> this standards publication is also classified as a User Comment. User<br />

Comments are solicited at any time. In preparation <strong>of</strong> this <strong>NTCIP</strong> standards publication, input <strong>of</strong> users<br />

and other interested parties was sought and evaluated.<br />

All User Comments will be referred to the committee responsible for developing and/or maintaining this<br />

standards publication. The committee chairperson, or their designee, may contact the submitter for<br />

clarification <strong>of</strong> the User Comment. When the committee chairperson or designee reports the committee’s<br />

consensus opinion related to the User Comment, that opinion will be forwarded to the submitter. The<br />

committee chairperson may report that action on the User Comment may be deferred to a future<br />

committee meeting and/or a future revision <strong>of</strong> the standards publication. Previous User Comments and<br />

their disposition may be available for reference and information at www.ntcip.org.<br />

A User Comment should be submitted to this address:<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> Coordinator<br />

National Electrical Manufacturers Association<br />

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752<br />

Rosslyn, Virginia 22209-3801<br />

e-mail: ntcip@nema.org<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page iii<br />

A User Comment should be submitted in the following form:<br />

<strong>Standard</strong>s Publication number and version:<br />

Page:<br />

Section, Paragraph, or Clause:<br />

Comment:<br />

Editorial or Substantive?:<br />

Suggested Alternative Language:<br />

Please include your name, organization, and address in your correspondence.<br />

Approvals<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 was separately balloted and approved by AASHTO, ITE, and NEMA after<br />

recommendation by the Joint Committee on the <strong>NTCIP</strong>. Each organization has approved this standard as<br />

the following standard type, as <strong>of</strong> the date:<br />

AASHTO—<strong>Standard</strong> Specification; **** 2011<br />

ITE—S<strong>of</strong>tware <strong>Standard</strong>; **** 2011<br />

NEMA—<strong>Standard</strong>; **** 2011<br />

History<br />

A brief history <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> follows:<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01.19—Between 1999 and 2002, two user comment drafts were issued for<br />

review. In 2003, v01.18 was accepted as a <strong>Recommended</strong> <strong>Standard</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Joint Committee. In<br />

2005, and after disposition <strong>of</strong> ballot comments, v01.18e was Jointly Approved. In November<br />

2005, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v01.19 was published as <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005.<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02—Between 2004 and 2007, the TSS WG developed drafts with additional<br />

Systems Engineering content, and support for machine vision detection technology. In August<br />

2007, the User Comment Draft <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.10 was issued for user review and comment. In<br />

April 2008, after disposition <strong>of</strong> user comments, the <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.15 was accepted as a<br />

<strong>Recommended</strong> <strong>Standard</strong>. In October 2010, after lifting a hold imposed by Normative References,<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong> was edited for SDO balloting and approval. In December 2010, <strong>v02.17</strong> was<br />

issued with <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>Standard</strong>s Bulletin B0141.<br />

Compatibility <strong>of</strong> Versions<br />

To distinguish <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 (as published) from previous drafts, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 also includes<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong> on each page header. All <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>Standard</strong>s Publications have a major and minor<br />

version number for configuration management. The version number syntax is "v00.00a," with the major<br />

version number before the period, and the minor version number and edition letter (if any) after the<br />

period.<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is designated, and should be cited as, <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103 v02. Anyone using <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103 v02<br />

should seek information about the version number that is <strong>of</strong> interest to them in any given circumstance.<br />

The MIB, the PRL, and the PICS should all reference the version number <strong>of</strong> the standards publication<br />

that was the source <strong>of</strong> the excerpted material.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page iv<br />

Conformant systems based on later, or higher, version numbers MAY NOT be compatible with<br />

conformant systems based on earlier, or lower, version numbers. Anyone using <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 should<br />

also consult <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02 for specific guidelines on compatibility.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page v<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Page<br />

SECTION 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................................. 1<br />

1.1 Scope......................................................................................................................................... 1<br />

1.2 References ................................................................................................................................ 1<br />

1.2.1 Normative References.................................................................................................. 1<br />

1.2.2 Other References ......................................................................................................... 1<br />

1.2.3 Contact Information ...................................................................................................... 2<br />

1.3 General Statements................................................................................................................... 2<br />

1.4 Terms......................................................................................................................................... 2<br />

SECTION 2 CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS [NORMATIVE] ........................................................................ 7<br />

2.1 Tutorial....................................................................................................................................... 7<br />

2.1.1 Background .................................................................................................................. 8<br />

2.1.2 Who are You?............................................................................................................... 8<br />

2.1.3 <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 Organization ..................................................................................... 9<br />

2.1.4 Sections for Specific Audiences................................................................................... 9<br />

2.2 Current Situation and Problem Statement................................................................................. 9<br />

2.3 Reference Physical Architecture ............................................................................................. 10<br />

2.3.1 Typical Physical Architecture ..................................................................................... 10<br />

2.3.2 Transportation Sensor Systems (TSS) ...................................................................... 11<br />

2.3.3 TSS Technologies ...................................................................................................... 11<br />

2.4 Architectual Needs .................................................................................................................. 12<br />

2.4.1 Fundamental Needs Driving TSS Deployment .......................................................... 12<br />

2.4.2 Operational Environment............................................................................................ 12<br />

2.5 Features................................................................................................................................... 12<br />

2.5.1 Configure the TSS...................................................................................................... 13<br />

2.5.2 Control the TSS .......................................................................................................... 15<br />

2.5.3 Monitor Current TSS Status ....................................................................................... 16<br />

2.5.4 Collect Data from TSS................................................................................................ 16<br />

2.5.5 Multi-Version Interoperability (MVI-Backward Compatibility) ..................................... 17<br />

2.6 Security.................................................................................................................................... 17<br />

2.7 Operational Policies and Constraints/Assumptions ................................................................ 17<br />

2.8 Relationship to the National ITS Architecture Flows............................................................... 18<br />

SECTION 3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS [NORMATIVE] ................................................................ 19<br />

3.1 Tutorial [INFORMATIVE]......................................................................................................... 19<br />

3.2 Protocol Requirements List (PRL)........................................................................................... 20<br />

3.2.1 User Needs Column ................................................................................................... 20<br />

3.2.2 Requirements Column................................................................................................ 20<br />

3.2.3 Conformance Column ................................................................................................ 20<br />

3.2.4 Support / Project Requirements Column.................................................................... 21<br />

3.2.5 Additional Specifications Column............................................................................... 21<br />

3.2.6 Instructions for Completing the PRL........................................................................... 22<br />

3.2.7 Conformance Definition.............................................................................................. 22<br />

3.2.8 Protocol Requirements List (PRL) Table.................................................................... 23<br />

3.3 Operational Environment Requirements ................................................................................. 30<br />

3.3.1 Support Live Data....................................................................................................... 30<br />

3.3.2 Support Batched Data ................................................................................................ 30<br />

3.4 Data Exchange Requirements ................................................................................................ 30<br />

3.4.1 Manage the TSS Configuration .................................................................................. 30<br />

3.4.2 Monitor the Current Status ......................................................................................... 40<br />

3.4.3 Collection <strong>of</strong> Sample Data.......................................................................................... 41<br />

3.5 Multi-Version Interoperability (MVI-Backward Compatibility) .................................................. 42<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page vi<br />

3.5.1 Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01)<br />

Conformant Data Sample Table.............................................................................................. 42<br />

3.5.2 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01)<br />

Conformant Historical Sample Data Table.............................................................................. 43<br />

3.5.3 Loop Output Conditioning Table................................................................................. 43<br />

SECTION 4 DIALOGS [NORMATIVE]....................................................................................................... 45<br />

4.1 Tutorial [INFORMATIVE]......................................................................................................... 47<br />

4.2 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Interface...................................................... 48<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface...................................................................................... 48<br />

4.2.2 Generic SNMP Get-Next Interface............................................................................. 48<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface ...................................................................................... 49<br />

4.2.4 Variable Binding List Structure ................................................................................... 50<br />

4.2.5 Additional Requirements ............................................................................................ 50<br />

4.3 Specified Dialogs..................................................................................................................... 50<br />

4.3.1 Managing the TSS Configuration ............................................................................... 51<br />

4.3.2 Monitoring the Status <strong>of</strong> the TSS ............................................................................... 56<br />

4.3.3 Retrieving Sample Data from TSS ............................................................................. 57<br />

4.3.4 Managing the Inductive Loop Features <strong>of</strong> the TSS.................................................... 61<br />

4.3.5 Managing the Machine Vision Features <strong>of</strong> the TSS................................................... 62<br />

4.4 State Tables ............................................................................................................................ 63<br />

4.4.1 State Transitions for sensorSystemStatus ................................................................. 63<br />

SECTION 5 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE (MIB) [NORMATIVE]............................................. 68<br />

5.1 Transportation Sensor System Objects .................................................................................. 68<br />

5.2 Sensor Configuration and Capability Objects ......................................................................... 70<br />

5.2.1 Sensor Reset, Resynchronization, and Diagnostics .................................................. 70<br />

5.2.2 Sensor System Status................................................................................................ 71<br />

5.2.3 Sensor System Occupancy Type............................................................................... 72<br />

5.2.4 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zones Parameter......................................................... 72<br />

5.2.5 Sensor Zone Table..................................................................................................... 72<br />

5.2.6 Clock Available ........................................................................................................... 79<br />

5.2.7 Sensor Technology..................................................................................................... 79<br />

5.2.8 Maximum Sample Data Entries.................................................................................. 79<br />

5.2.9 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Characters ............................................................................... 80<br />

5.2.10 Functional Capabilities ............................................................................................... 80<br />

5.2.11 External Arming Inputs ............................................................................................... 80<br />

5.2.12 Output Conditioning Table.......................................................................................... 81<br />

5.2.13 Pending Configuration File Name .............................................................................. 88<br />

5.3 Sensor Control Objects ........................................................................................................... 89<br />

5.3.1 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Outputs .................................................................................... 89<br />

5.3.2 Output Configuration Table ........................................................................................ 89<br />

5.3.3 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Output Groups ......................................................................... 94<br />

5.3.4 Output Group Table.................................................................................................... 94<br />

5.4 TSS Data Collection Objects................................................................................................... 95<br />

5.4.1 Data Collection Table ................................................................................................. 95<br />

5.4.2 Data Buffer Table ....................................................................................................... 98<br />

5.4.3 Zone Sequence Table .............................................................................................. 101<br />

5.4.4 Sample Data Table................................................................................................... 102<br />

5.4.5 Zone Class Table ..................................................................................................... 106<br />

5.5 Inductive Loop Detector Objects ........................................................................................... 106<br />

5.5.1 Loop System Setup Table ........................................................................................ 106<br />

5.5.2 Loop Output Conditioning Table............................................................................... 109<br />

5.5.3 Loop System Status Table ....................................................................................... 112<br />

5.6 Machine Vision Objects......................................................................................................... 115<br />

5.6.1 Maximum Camera Count ......................................................................................... 115<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page vii<br />

5.6.2 Machine Vision Camera Table ................................................................................. 115<br />

5.6.3 Image Zone Number................................................................................................. 118<br />

5.6.4 Image Type............................................................................................................... 118<br />

5.6.5 Image Overlay Type ................................................................................................. 118<br />

5.6.6 Image Format ........................................................................................................... 119<br />

5.6.7 Image Quality ........................................................................................................... 119<br />

5.6.8 Build Image............................................................................................................... 119<br />

5.6.9 Build Image Status ................................................................................................... 119<br />

ANNEX A REQUIREMENTS TRACEABILITY MATRIX (RTM) NORMATIVE ....................................... 121<br />

ANNEX B OBJECT TREE........................................................................................................................ 150<br />

ANNEX C TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................. 152<br />

ANNEX D DOCUMENTATION OF REVISIONS ...................................................................................... 153<br />

D.1 Systems Engineering Process .............................................................................................. 153<br />

D.2 General MIB Changes........................................................................................................... 153<br />

D.3 Deprecated Data Collection Table ........................................................................................ 153<br />

D.4 Deprecated Data Buffer Table............................................................................................... 153<br />

D.5 Deprecated Loop Output Conditioning Table........................................................................ 153<br />

D.6 Added Machine Vision Data Elements.................................................................................. 154<br />

D.7 Additional Data Elements ...................................................................................................... 154<br />

FIGURES<br />

Page<br />

Figure 1 Typical Physical Architecture........................................................................................................10<br />

Figure 2 Sample Sequence Diagram for Output Configuration..................................................................47<br />

Figure 3 SNMP Get Interface......................................................................................................................48<br />

Figure 4 SNMP GetNext Interface ..............................................................................................................49<br />

Figure 5 SNMP Set Interface ......................................................................................................................49<br />

Figure 6 SNMP Interface—View <strong>of</strong> Participating Classes ..........................................................................50<br />

Figure 7 Object Tree for <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 ................................................................................................151<br />

TABLES<br />

Page<br />

Table 1 User Needs and National ITS Architecture Flows .........................................................................18<br />

Table 2 Status Symbols ..............................................................................................................................20<br />

Table 3 Predicate Notations........................................................................................................................21<br />

Table 4 Predicate to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 Section Mapping ............................................................................21<br />

Table 5 Support / Project Requirement Column Entries.............................................................................21<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page viii<br />

< This page intentionally left blank. ><br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 1<br />

Section 1<br />

GENERAL<br />

1.1 SCOPE<br />

Communication between an ITS Management Center or portable computer and a Transportation Sensor<br />

System (TSS) is accomplished by using <strong>NTCIP</strong> Application Layer services to convey requests to access<br />

or modify values <strong>of</strong> TSS data elements resident in the TSS via an <strong>NTCIP</strong> network. An <strong>NTCIP</strong> message<br />

consists <strong>of</strong> a specific Application Layer service and a set <strong>of</strong> data elements. An <strong>NTCIP</strong> message may be<br />

conveyed using any <strong>NTCIP</strong> defined class <strong>of</strong> service that has been specified to be compatible with the<br />

Simple Transportation Management Framework (STMF).<br />

The scope <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is limited to the functionality related to TSS within a transportation<br />

environment. <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 defines data elements that are specific to TSS and also defines<br />

standardized data element groups that can be used for conformance statements. The limits and<br />

descriptions <strong>of</strong> the parameters are established to give the user maximum flexibility to operate TSS that<br />

either existed when <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 was developed or may exist in the future.<br />

1.2 REFERENCES<br />

Normative references contain provisions that, through reference in this text, constitute provisions <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. Other references in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 might provide a complete understanding <strong>of</strong> the<br />

entire protocol and the relations between all parts <strong>of</strong> the protocol. At the time <strong>of</strong> publication, the editions<br />

indicated were valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this<br />

standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility <strong>of</strong> applying the most recent editions <strong>of</strong> the standard<br />

listed.<br />

1.2.1 Normative References<br />

IAB Std. 16 / RFC 1155 Structure and Identification <strong>of</strong> Management Information for TCP/IP-based<br />

Internets<br />

IAB Std. 16 / RFC 1212<br />

ISO/IEC 8824-1:2008<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103 v02<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 2301 v02<br />

Concise MIB Definitions<br />

Information Technology—Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1):<br />

Specification <strong>of</strong> Basic Notation<br />

Transportation Management Protocols (TMP)<br />

July 2010 edition published in October 2010<br />

Global Object (GO) Definitions<br />

December 2010 edition to be published in 2011<br />

Simple Transportation Management Framework (STMF) Application<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>ile (AP) (AP-STMF)<br />

July 2010 edition published in September 2010<br />

1.2.2 Other References<br />

IAB Std. 17 / RFC 1213<br />

Management Information Base for Network Management <strong>of</strong> TCP/IP-based<br />

internets:MIB-II<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 2<br />

ISO/IEC 8825-1:2008<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02<br />

AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 9001 v04<br />

RFC 1157<br />

David Perkins & Evan<br />

McGinnis<br />

Information Technology—ASN.1 Encoding Rules: Specification <strong>of</strong> Basic<br />

Encoding Rules (BER), Canonical Encoding Rules (CER) and Distinguished<br />

Encoding Rules (DER)<br />

Structure and Identification <strong>of</strong> Management Information (SMI)<br />

published June 2010<br />

The <strong>NTCIP</strong> Guide<br />

published July 2009<br />

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)<br />

Understanding SNMP MIBs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall PTR, 1997, ISBN 0-<br />

13-437708-<br />

1.2.3 Contact Information<br />

1.2.3.1 <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>Standard</strong>s<br />

For revision information on this <strong>NTCIP</strong> standard, contact:<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> Coordinator<br />

National Electrical Manufacturers Association<br />

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752<br />

Rosslyn, VA 22209-3801<br />

e-mail: ntcip@nema.org<br />

For draft revisions to this <strong>NTCIP</strong> standard, and recommended revisions <strong>of</strong> the <strong>NTCIP</strong> Joint Committee,<br />

visit www.ntcip.org.<br />

1.2.3.2 Internet Architecture Board (IAB) Documents<br />

For Internet Architecture Board (IAB) documents, contact:<br />

Internet Architecture Board (IAB)<br />

www.rfc-editor.org<br />

www.rfc-editor.org/repositories.html<br />

1.2.3.3 ISO/IEC <strong>Standard</strong>s<br />

Members <strong>of</strong> ISO maintain registers <strong>of</strong> currently valid ISO/IEC International <strong>Standard</strong>s. For the U.S., the<br />

member <strong>of</strong> ISO is the American National <strong>Standard</strong>s <strong>Institute</strong> (ANSI), which may be contacted as follows:<br />

1.3 GENERAL STATEMENTS<br />

No general statements are included.<br />

ANSI<br />

11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor<br />

New York, NY 10036<br />

(212) 642-4900<br />

http://global.ihs.com<br />

1.4 TERMS<br />

For the purposes <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, the following terms and definitions (with acronyms, where<br />

appropriate) apply. For terms not defined in this section, English words are used in accordance with their<br />

definitions in the latest edition <strong>of</strong> Webster's New Collegiate Dictionary. Electrical and electronic terms not<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 3<br />

defined in this section or in Webster's New Collegiate Dictionary are used in accordance with their<br />

definitions in IEEE Std 100-2000.<br />

Arming Enable<br />

Arming Input Bit<br />

Arming Pin<br />

class<br />

A selected state <strong>of</strong> an arming input bit or Arming Pin <strong>of</strong> the TSS that can be<br />

used to modify its operation.<br />

An external event that is reported to the TSS using this protocol and used to<br />

modify its operation.<br />

A physical input to the TSS that can be monitored and used to modify its<br />

operation.<br />

A subdivision <strong>of</strong> collected historical sample data.<br />

NOTE—How the sample data is subdivided is manufacturer-specific and is,<br />

therefore, kept generic in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

ConOps<br />

CTime<br />

delay<br />

deprecated<br />

Concept <strong>of</strong> Operations<br />

CTime is a function that converts a long integer, pointed to by a clock function,<br />

representing the time in seconds since the Epoch (00:000:00 UTC, January 1,<br />

1970), and returns a pointer to a 26-character string <strong>of</strong> the form Www Mmm dd<br />

hh:mm:ss yyyy \n\0 (e.g., Thu Nov 24 18:22:48 2001\n\0) with Www being<br />

weekday, Mmm being month, dd being day, hh being hour, mm being minute, ss<br />

being second, yyyy being year, \n being a new line control code, and \0 being a<br />

null-character control code. All fields have a consistent width. Time zone and<br />

daylight saving time (DST) corrections are made before string generation.<br />

A feature that allows the detection output from a TSS detector to be deferred for<br />

a user set time period.<br />

In the context <strong>of</strong> a MIB, ‘deprecated’ is an object STATUS value that indicates<br />

the object is valid in limited circumstances and may have been replaced by<br />

another.<br />

NOTE—To maintain multi-version interoperability (MVI-backward compatibility)<br />

for legacy <strong>NTCIP</strong> implementations, objects with a STATUS value <strong>of</strong> ‘deprecated’<br />

may require support. When necessary to support legacy <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

implementations, required support for objects with a STATUS value <strong>of</strong><br />

‘deprecated’ is indicated using the Pr<strong>of</strong>ile Implementation Conformance<br />

Statement (PICS), Protocol Requirements List (PRL). From <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02.<br />

DST<br />

extension<br />

Fail-Safe Mode<br />

feature<br />

Firmware Version<br />

Daylight Saving Time<br />

A feature that allows the detection output from a TSS detector to be lengthened<br />

for a user set time period.<br />

Capable <strong>of</strong> compensating automatically and safely for a failure, as a mechanism<br />

or power source.<br />

A service provided by or behavior <strong>of</strong> the TSS.<br />

A manufacturer specified description for identifying the s<strong>of</strong>tware currently<br />

embedded in the TSS.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 4<br />

Hardware Version<br />

interchangeability<br />

interoperability<br />

A manufacturer specified description for identifying the electronic components<br />

that comprise the TSS.<br />

A condition that exists when two or more items possess such functional and<br />

physical characteristics as to be equivalent in performance and durability, and<br />

are capable <strong>of</strong> being exchanged one for the other without alteration <strong>of</strong> the items<br />

themselves, or adjoining items, except for adjustment, and without selection for<br />

fit and performance. (National Telecommunications and Information<br />

Administration, U.S. Department <strong>of</strong> Commerce)<br />

The ability <strong>of</strong> two or more systems or components to exchange information and<br />

use the information that has been exchanged.<br />

NOTE—From IEEE <strong>Standard</strong>s Dictionary, Glossary <strong>of</strong> Terms and Definitions.<br />

Live Data<br />

LSB<br />

Management<br />

Information Base<br />

(MIB)<br />

Management<br />

Station<br />

MSB<br />

MVI<br />

Near Real-Time<br />

Data<br />

normalized<br />

obsolete<br />

A specific operational network configuration between the management station<br />

and the TSS where the information exchange can be performed without the<br />

need for initiating and terminating a physical network connection between the<br />

management station and TSS. From a network perspective, this configuration is<br />

an ‘always on’ connection, where the management station has access to the<br />

‘current’ information available in the TSS.<br />

Least Significant Bit<br />

A structured collection or database <strong>of</strong> related managed objects defined using<br />

Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1).<br />

NOTE—The information is provided in Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1)<br />

format. From <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02 and ISO/IEC 8824-1:2008 and ISO/IEC 8825-<br />

1:2008.”<br />

A remote computer (e.g., Traffic Management Center), local computer (e.g.,<br />

Laptop), or local controller (e.g., Traffic Controller).<br />

Most Significant Bit<br />

Multi-Version Interoperability (backward compatibility)<br />

Data that depicts an event as it existed at the current time less the processing<br />

time. The data varies from real time data because it is dependent on the type<br />

and speed <strong>of</strong> transmission. This data is useable for identifying changes in traffic<br />

flows.<br />

Process <strong>of</strong> reducing sample data to a common denominator to accommodate<br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> the measured data.<br />

In the context <strong>of</strong> a MIB, ‘obsolete’ is an object STATUS value that indicates the<br />

definition is no longer valid, was found to be flawed, redundant, or was not<br />

useful.<br />

NOTE—In the next (or some future) edition <strong>of</strong> the standard, the object or group<br />

with a STATUS value <strong>of</strong> ‘obsolete’ may be removed. This definition is modified<br />

from Understanding SNMP MIBS. From <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 5<br />

occupancy<br />

output<br />

Output Mode<br />

Output Group<br />

PRL<br />

protocol<br />

A measurement <strong>of</strong> vehicle presence within a zone <strong>of</strong> detection, expressed in<br />

seconds <strong>of</strong> time a given point or area is occupied by a vehicle.<br />

The condition <strong>of</strong> an on/<strong>of</strong>f status generated by a change <strong>of</strong> state.<br />

There are two common modes, Presence and Pulse. In the presence output<br />

mode, a detection <strong>of</strong> a vehicle is output constantly while the vehicle is in the<br />

zone. In the pulse output mode, a detection is output for 125 milliseconds (± 25<br />

milliseconds) and then the zone is retuned.<br />

Represents a multiple <strong>of</strong> eight (8) sequentially numbered outputs. Output Group<br />

1 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 1 to 8, Output Group 2 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 9 to 16, etc.<br />

Protocol Requirements List<br />

A specific set <strong>of</strong> rules, procedures, and conventions defining the format and<br />

timing <strong>of</strong> data transmissions between devices that are accepted and used to<br />

understand each other.<br />

NOTE—From <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02.<br />

Protocol Version<br />

Requirement<br />

Requirements<br />

Traceability<br />

RTC<br />

RTM<br />

Sample Period<br />

Sensitivity<br />

Sensitivity Mode<br />

Sensor<br />

SEP<br />

SNMP<br />

Transportation<br />

Sensor System<br />

(TSS)<br />

User<br />

A standardized description for identifying the version <strong>of</strong> the TSS standard to<br />

which the TSS is designed to conform.<br />

A condition or capability to which a system must conform, either derived directly<br />

from the user needs, or stated in a contract, standard, specification, or other<br />

formally imposed document. A desired feature, property, or behavior <strong>of</strong> a<br />

system.<br />

The ability to follow or study the logical progression among the needs,<br />

requirements, and design details in a step-by-step fashion.<br />

Real Time Clock<br />

Requirements Traceability Matrix<br />

Duration <strong>of</strong> time in seconds when data for the zone is being collected.<br />

The ability <strong>of</strong> the TSS to react to incoming signals, expressed as the minimum<br />

input signal required to produce an output signal.<br />

A characteristic <strong>of</strong> the loop detector being used. It is defined as either ∆L/L,<br />

∆L/√L, or ∆L.<br />

A physical device used for sensing traffic.<br />

Systems Engineering Process<br />

Simple Network Management Protocol<br />

Any system capable <strong>of</strong> sensing and communicating near real-time traffic<br />

parameters using <strong>NTCIP</strong>.<br />

A person who will utilize the system that is developed.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 6<br />

User Need<br />

Virtual Zone<br />

Zone<br />

The business or operational problem (opportunity) that must be fulfilled in order<br />

to justify purchase or use. While this is termed a ‘user need’ within the <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

community, it reflects needs <strong>of</strong> all stakeholders.<br />

A logical combination <strong>of</strong> one or more zones to create a new zone with its own<br />

conditioning and Arming Enables. This is useful in combining zones to a single<br />

zone to provide one output from many zones. This can also be used to alias a<br />

zone so that the same zone can provide multiple outputs, each with different<br />

conditioning parameters, sample periods, and/or trigger usage.<br />

An area in which traffic parameters can be measured and/or traffic data can be<br />

generated.<br />

NOTE—A zone may denote or represent a lane <strong>of</strong> a freeway, a left turn lane, or<br />

even a multiple lane area. The zone may be either physical or non-intrusive.<br />

Examples <strong>of</strong> this are a physical loop cut into the roadway or a spot on a roadway<br />

where a video image processor is measuring data or detecting presence. In<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, a Zone is independent <strong>of</strong> the underlying technology used to<br />

measure and collect its data. Further, the term ‘sensor zone’ is used<br />

interchangeably with the term ‘zone,’ because a predecessor <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong><br />

v02 used the term ‘sensor zone,’ and using the term ‘zone’ throughout would<br />

have necessitated changes in OBJECT-TYPE, and possible deprecation.<br />

Therefore, both terms are used interchangeably.<br />

Zone Options<br />

Special settings for controlling the behavior <strong>of</strong> zones.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 7<br />

Section 2<br />

CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS<br />

[Normative]<br />

Section 2 defines the user needs that subsequent sections address. Accepted System Engineering<br />

Process (SEP) details that requirements should only be developed to fulfill well-defined user needs. The<br />

first stage in this process is to identify the ways in which the system is to be used. For <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02,<br />

this entails identifying the various ways in which transportation operations personnel may use TSS<br />

information to fulfill their duties.<br />

This concept <strong>of</strong> operations (ConOps) provides the reader with:<br />

a) A detailed description <strong>of</strong> the scope <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02;<br />

b) An explanation <strong>of</strong> how a TSS is expected to fit into the larger context <strong>of</strong> an ITS system;<br />

c) A starting point in the procurement process; and<br />

d) An understanding <strong>of</strong> how <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is designed.<br />

Section 2 is intended for all readers, including:<br />

a) Transportation operations managers<br />

b) Transportation operations personnel<br />

c) Transportation engineers<br />

d) System integrators<br />

e) Manufacturers<br />

For the first three categories <strong>of</strong> readers, Section 2 provides a useful understanding <strong>of</strong> how TSS<br />

equipment can be used in the reader’s system. For this audience, Section 2 serves as the starting point in<br />

the procurement process, enabling readers to become familiar with each <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 feature and<br />

determine whether that feature is appropriate for their implementation. If it is, then an agency’s<br />

procurement specification should require support for that feature and all <strong>of</strong> the mandatory requirements<br />

related to that feature.<br />

For the last two categories <strong>of</strong> readers, Section 2 is useful to gain a more thorough understanding as to<br />

why the more detailed requirements (specified in subsequent sections) exist.<br />

2.1 TUTORIAL<br />

The size and technical level <strong>of</strong> detail contained in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 might be a bit intimidating. Therefore,<br />

Section 2.1 has been added to provide a more manageable overview.<br />

A Concept <strong>of</strong> Operations (ConOps) describes a proposed system from the user's perspective. Typically, a<br />

ConOps is used on a project to ensure that system developers understand user needs. In <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

standards, the ConOps documents the intent <strong>of</strong> each feature for which an <strong>NTCIP</strong> standard supports a<br />

communications interface. It also serves as a starting point for users to select which features may be<br />

appropriate for their project.<br />

The ConOps starts with a discussion <strong>of</strong> the current situation and issues that have led to the need to<br />

deploy systems covered by the scope <strong>of</strong> an <strong>NTCIP</strong> standard, and to the development <strong>of</strong> an <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

standard itself. This discussion is presented in lay terms so that both potential users <strong>of</strong> the system and<br />

system developers can understand and appreciate the situation.<br />

The ConOps then documents key aspects about the proposed system, including the:<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 8<br />

a) Reference physical architecture—The reference physical architecture defines the overall context <strong>of</strong><br />

the proposed system and defines the specific interface addressed. The reference physical<br />

architecture may be supplemented with one or more samples that describe how the reference<br />

physical architecture may be realized in an actual deployment.<br />

b) Architectural Needs—Architectural needs discuss the issues and needs relative to the system<br />

architecture that have a direct impact the subject area.<br />

c) Features—The features identify and describe the various functions that users may want the TSS to<br />

perform. These features are derived from the high-level user needs identified in the problem<br />

statement, but are refined and organized into a more manageable structure that forms the basis <strong>of</strong><br />

the Protocol Requirements List (PRL) and Requirements Traceability Matrix (RTM) contained in<br />

Section 3 and Annex A, respectively.<br />

The architectural needs and features are collectively called user needs. Section 3 uses these user needs<br />

in the analysis <strong>of</strong> the system to define the various functional requirements <strong>of</strong> a TSS. Each user need is<br />

required to trace to one or more functional requirements, and each functional requirement is required to<br />

derive from at least one user need. This traceability is shown in the PRL in Section 1.1.1.<br />

While <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is intended to standardize communications across a wide range <strong>of</strong> deployments, it<br />

is not intended to mandate support for every feature for every deployment. Therefore, the PRL also<br />

defines each user need and requirement as mandatory, optional, or conditional. The only items marked<br />

mandatory are those that relate to the most basic functionality <strong>of</strong> the TSS. To obtain a TSS that meets<br />

specific needs, the user first identifies which optional needs are necessary for the specific project.<br />

Each requirement identified is then presented in the RTM in Annex A, which defines how the requirement<br />

is fulfilled through the standardized dialogs and data element definitions provided in Section 4 and<br />

Section 5, respectively.<br />

2.1.1 Background<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is a standard that specifies the logical interface between Transportation Sensor<br />

Systems (TSS) and the host systems that control them (commonly referred to as central systems). <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong> v02 describes the supported TSS interface functionality in terms <strong>of</strong> user needs and requirements.<br />

As for limitations, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 defines data that could be transmitted between a central system and a<br />

conformant TSS, but it does not define the functionalities and functions available within a TSS or a central<br />

system. Also, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 does not claim to address all potential capabilities <strong>of</strong> a TSS or a<br />

controlling/monitoring central system, because such a claim would not permit progress (i.e., if the<br />

possibility <strong>of</strong> defining extensions is precluded, no additional functionalities could be added, either by<br />

subsequent versions <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 or by vendors or agencies).<br />

It is also <strong>of</strong> utmost importance to understand that not all <strong>of</strong> the functionalities have to be supported by a<br />

TSS (or a central system) to claim conformance to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. Instead, the project-specific agency<br />

specifications that reference and incorporate desired applicable functionalities from <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 are<br />

the guiding requirements that determine compliance. See <strong>NTCIP</strong> 9001 v04 for further information about<br />

the relationship between conformance to a standard, and compliance with an agency specification.<br />

2.1.2 Who are You?<br />

In developing <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, certain assumptions were made about readers and readers’ needs.<br />

Target readers for <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 include those who:<br />

a) Have heard about <strong>NTCIP</strong> and are interested in its applicability for deploying TSS;<br />

b) Are involved in writing agency specifications to procure TSS;<br />

c) Are involved in reviewing submittals to procure TSS;<br />

d) Are involved in s<strong>of</strong>tware development, be it the firmware <strong>of</strong> a sensor or the s<strong>of</strong>tware <strong>of</strong> the central<br />

system;<br />

e) Are involved in testing sensors or central systems; or<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 9<br />

f) Are involved in the operational use <strong>of</strong> these types <strong>of</strong> sensors.<br />

2.1.3 <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 Organization<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 contains the following sections:<br />

a) Section 1—General—This section provides the user with references, terms, and other information.<br />

b) Section 2—Concept <strong>of</strong> Operations (ConOps)—This section provides a description <strong>of</strong> user needs<br />

(needs for features and needs related to the operational environment) applicable to TSS.<br />

c) Section 3—Functional Requirements—This section defines the functional requirements that address<br />

the user needs identified in the ConOps. It includes a Protocol Requirements List (PRL) that defines<br />

conformance requirements, thereby allowing users to select the desired options for a particular<br />

project.<br />

d) Section 4—Dialogs—This section describes how each functional requirement is fulfilled. Dialogs<br />

define the standardized procedures for a central system to manage a sensor. Interface specifications<br />

define the operations that are allowed by the sensor and how data elements are interrelated.<br />

e) Section 5—Management Information Base (MIB)—This section defines the data elements (object<br />

definitions) exchanged during communications, and includes a Management Information Base (MIB).<br />

f) Annex A—Requirements Traceability Matrix (RTM)—This annex provides a table that traces each<br />

requirement to a dialog, one or more interfaces, and its associated list <strong>of</strong> objects.<br />

g) Annex B—Object Tree—This annex provides a depiction <strong>of</strong> the high-level object tree showing the<br />

nodes and some <strong>of</strong> the scalar objects. This object tree provides the user with a high-level orientation<br />

tool to navigate the data elements.<br />

h) Annex C—Test Procedures—This annex is a placeholder for standardized test procedures that<br />

address TSS needs and requirements. No test procedures are yet provided; however, when<br />

developed and accepted, Annex C is designated for test procedures.<br />

i) Annex D—Documentation <strong>of</strong> Revisions—This annex documents significant revisions between <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong> v02, and its predecessor <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005.<br />

2.1.4 Sections for Specific Audiences<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 has been designed for different audiences. The following guidance identifies the most<br />

relevant <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 section(s) for a specific audience. For example, Agency Specification Writers /<br />

Purchasers, may benefit from an understanding <strong>of</strong> functional and operational requirements and contexts<br />

for which the overall technical requirements <strong>of</strong> the TSS are to be used. In contrast, Submittal Reviewers,<br />

Firmware/S<strong>of</strong>tware Developers, and/or Tester, may wish to additionally focus on agency specifications,<br />

many elements <strong>of</strong> which may be derived from selected sections <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. Specific audiences<br />

are encouraged to focus on the sections indicated:<br />

a) General Interest—Review Sections 1 and 2.<br />

b) Specification Writers/Purchasers—Review Sections 1, 2, and 3.<br />

c) Submittal Reviewers—Review Sections 1, 2, and 3, and Annex A (RTM).<br />

d) Firmware/S<strong>of</strong>tware Developers—Review all Sections and Annexes.<br />

e) Testers—Review all Sections and Annexes.<br />

f) Operators—Review Sections 1 and 2.<br />

2.2 CURRENT SITUATION AND PROBLEM STATEMENT<br />

Transportation system managers use TSS in a variety <strong>of</strong> ways to improve transportation system<br />

operations. To facilitate efficient movement within a transportation system, system operators need timely<br />

and accurate information on traffic flow within the system. This is typically accomplished by measuring<br />

traffic parameters at desired locations within the transportation system.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 10<br />

2.3 REFERENCE PHYSICAL ARCHITECTURE<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 addresses the communications interface between a management station and a TSS.<br />

The following paragraphs further explain the typical physical architectures used in conjunction with TSS<br />

and addressed by <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

2.3.1 Typical Physical Architecture<br />

Once installed, a management station is able to communicate with the TSS through one or more <strong>of</strong> the<br />

following three mechanisms:<br />

a) Remote Computer—This type <strong>of</strong> operation configures operational parameters and retrieves<br />

measured traffic parameters from a computer located at a remote location, such as a Traffic<br />

Management Center (TMC). This is known as either 'central' or 'remote' operation.<br />

b) Local Controller—This type <strong>of</strong> operation configures operational parameters and retrieves measured<br />

traffic parameters through a local controller such as a traffic controller.<br />

c) Local Computer—This type <strong>of</strong> operation performs the same functions as a remote computer, but<br />

uses a portable (e.g., laptop) computer connected directly to a port on the TSS. This port may be the<br />

same port used for the other communications mechanisms, or may be a dedicated port for this<br />

purpose.<br />

Several management stations may communicate with the same TSS. The user should ensure that only<br />

one management station at a time configures the operational parameters <strong>of</strong> the TSS. All management<br />

stations may retrieve measured traffic parameters.<br />

The connection between the remote computer and a TSS runs over a telecommunications network, which<br />

can be either wireline or wireless in nature.<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is only concerned with the interface between an external computer and the TSS. To<br />

fulfill all <strong>of</strong> the end-user services, additional requirements may be necessary for the external management<br />

stations.<br />

Figure 1 depicts the typical physical architecture <strong>of</strong> the key components related to TSS.<br />

Management Stations<br />

TSS<br />

Zones<br />

Remote Computer<br />

(TMC)<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

TSS (Sensor)<br />

Zone<br />

1…X<br />

Local Controller<br />

(Traffic / Ramp)<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

TSS (Sensor)<br />

Local Controller<br />

Zone<br />

1…X<br />

Covered by<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

TSS (Sensor)<br />

Machine Vision<br />

Zone<br />

1…X<br />

Local Computer<br />

(Laptop)<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

Figure 1 Typical Physical Architecture<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 11<br />

2.3.2 Transportation Sensor Systems (TSS)<br />

The selection <strong>of</strong> Transportation Sensor System (TSS) as a name for what was originally regarded as<br />

‘advanced sensors’ stemmed from the realization that modern sensors extend well beyond the simple<br />

detection <strong>of</strong> automobiles and now include light-rail vehicles, pedestrians, and many other modes <strong>of</strong><br />

transportation. In addition, modern detection devices are now viewed as sensing systems, rather than<br />

simple sensors or detectors. As a result, the name Transportation Sensor System (TSS) has evolved to<br />

identify a class <strong>of</strong> technology that is used for detection within the transportation community.<br />

A TSS is defined as any system capable <strong>of</strong> sensing and communicating near real-time traffic parameters<br />

using the <strong>NTCIP</strong>. See Section 1.4.<br />

In its simplest form, a TSS could be a single loop detector that is capable <strong>of</strong> communicating using <strong>NTCIP</strong>.<br />

Other more elaborate systems can include visual image processing systems that are used for sensing<br />

and communicating a variety <strong>of</strong> traffic parameters. The key factor that sets a TSS apart from a simple<br />

detector is the ability to communicate. Ultimately, one can envision a scenario where a combination,<br />

including a simple detector and some sort <strong>of</strong> remote processing unit with communications capabilities,<br />

could be configured as a TSS (examples include a traffic signal controller, ramp metering controller, etc.)<br />

However, traffic signal controllers and ramp metering controllers (as examples) might use their own<br />

detection-related data elements that are designed specifically to address their primary function.<br />

2.3.2.1 Description <strong>of</strong> Zone<br />

A zone is an area within which traffic parameters can be measured. A zone is an abstract representation<br />

<strong>of</strong> area that is independent <strong>of</strong> technology. TSS data elements allow up to 255 zones per TSS.<br />

Traditionally, the terminology ‘sensor’ and ‘detector’ were used in a variety <strong>of</strong> ways that <strong>of</strong>ten referred to<br />

the physical device used for detection or the area where the detection was occurring. Sometimes these<br />

terms meant an inductive loop amplifier or some other device used for measuring traffic parameters, and<br />

other times these terms defined the area where the traffic measurements were being taken, as is the<br />

case with some visual image processing systems. The use <strong>of</strong> the term ‘zone’ as a descriptor for any<br />

entity capable <strong>of</strong> sensing or measuring traffic parameters and/or gathering traffic data is an effort to move<br />

away from technology dependencies and ambiguous terminology.<br />

2.3.2.2 Description <strong>of</strong> Virtual Zone<br />

A virtual zone is the term used in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 to identify a zone that is created as the result <strong>of</strong> logical<br />

combinations <strong>of</strong> physical zones. For example, in the case <strong>of</strong> an ‘OR’ combination <strong>of</strong> three detector zones<br />

mapped to one output, the three physical zones are logically grouped to a fourth zone that exists only to<br />

provide the resultant output. This fourth zone might be referred to as a virtual zone since it has no direct<br />

sensing capability. This virtual zone is the result <strong>of</strong> the logical combination <strong>of</strong> other zones and would<br />

otherwise have all the characteristics associated with a physical zone. There is no differentiation in this<br />

standard between ‘zone’ and ‘virtual zone’, since all zones have identical characteristics and can be used<br />

in either fashion. The concept <strong>of</strong> virtual zones is presented here only as a means <strong>of</strong> describing the<br />

ConOps for logically combining zones.<br />

2.3.3 TSS Technologies<br />

TSS can be based on many different sensing technologies. Each sensing technology has strengths and<br />

weaknesses. Not all sensing technologies can measure all traffic parameters. The configuration<br />

requirements for sensing technologies differ and are addressed on a technology-by-technology basis.<br />

Although all sensing technologies can operate within the TSS framework, each sensing technology may<br />

require separate configuration information. Discussions <strong>of</strong> sensing technologies included in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong><br />

v02 follow.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 12<br />

2.3.3.1 Inductive Loop<br />

Inductive loop vehicle detectors have existed since the 1950s and are the most used technology for<br />

vehicle detection. Inductive loop detectors sense changes in a magnetic field created by a coil (loop) <strong>of</strong><br />

wire embedded in the driving surface. As electrically conductive material enters the loop, the amount <strong>of</strong><br />

energy that can be stored in the magnetic field (inductance) <strong>of</strong> the loop is decreased. This decrease in<br />

inductance is measured by the detector and, when a predetermined amount <strong>of</strong> change has been sensed,<br />

a detect signal is output. Current inductive loop detectors are microprocessor-based and implement<br />

advanced algorithms to provide accurate, dependable, and effective vehicle detection.<br />

2.3.3.2 Machine Vision (Video)<br />

Machine vision is a detection technology where video is processed to determine various elements <strong>of</strong><br />

vehicle detection. Analog or digital video cameras are mounted above ground and provide images <strong>of</strong><br />

vehicle traffic to a video processor. Video is processed through the use <strong>of</strong> various algorithms to determine<br />

the presence or non-presence <strong>of</strong> vehicles as well as to calculate various traffic parameters, such as<br />

counts, speeds, and lane occupancy.<br />

2.4 ARCHITECTUAL NEEDS<br />

2.4.1 Fundamental Needs Driving TSS Deployment<br />

Access to timely and accurate traffic parameters provides the information necessary to facilitate efficient<br />

movement within a transportation system.<br />

2.4.2 Operational Environment<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 addresses the interface between a TSS and a management station. To enable<br />

communications between these components, the management station needs to establish a<br />

communications link with the desired TSS.<br />

2.4.2.1 Live Data Exchange<br />

The typical operational environment allows the management station to monitor and control the TSS by<br />

issuing requests (e.g., requests to access and/or alter configuration parameters or requests to access<br />

measured traffic parameters). In this environment, the TSS responds to requests from a management<br />

station immediately (e.g., through the provision <strong>of</strong> the requested parameters or success/failure notice <strong>of</strong><br />

configuration changes). Information from one TSS can be requested by many management stations (e.g.,<br />

intersection control, ramp metering, traffic management center).<br />

2.4.2.2 Support Batched Off-Line Data Logs<br />

Some TSS operational environments do not have always-on connections (e.g., dial-up links). In such<br />

environments, a transportation system operator may wish to define conditions under which data is placed<br />

into a log, which can then be uploaded at a later time.<br />

2.5 FEATURES<br />

Section 2.5 identifies and describes the various standard features that may be <strong>of</strong>fered by a TSS. Section<br />

3 uses these features in the analysis <strong>of</strong> the system to define the various functional requirements <strong>of</strong> a<br />

TSS. A conformant TSS may <strong>of</strong>fer additional features, as long as they are conformant with <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong><br />

v02 requirements.<br />

NOTE—Off-the-shelf interoperability and interchangeability are achieved through well-documented<br />

features broadly supported by the industry as a whole. Designing a system that uses features not<br />

standardized or not typically deployed in combination with one another inhibits the goals <strong>of</strong><br />

interoperability and interchangeability, especially if the documentation <strong>of</strong> these features is not available<br />

for distribution to system integrators. <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 and other standards allow the use <strong>of</strong> additional<br />

features to support innovation, which is constantly needed within the industry, but users should be aware<br />

<strong>of</strong> the risks to interoperability when doing so.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 13<br />

The operation <strong>of</strong> a TSS can be categorized into four major areas:<br />

a) Configure the TSS<br />

b) Control the TSS<br />

c) Monitor the TSS<br />

d) Collect data from the TSS<br />

2.5.1 Configure the TSS<br />

The various sub-features for managing the TSS configuration include:<br />

a) Determine the TSS Identity<br />

b) Determine TSS Capabilities<br />

c) Determine the Sequence <strong>of</strong> Sample Periods<br />

d) Determine the Age <strong>of</strong> Sample Data<br />

e) Configure Zones<br />

f) Configure Outputs<br />

g) Configure Arming Enables<br />

h) Configuration Files<br />

These sub-features are detailed subsequently.<br />

2.5.1.1 Determine the TSS Identity<br />

The type <strong>of</strong> sensor technology determines what specific features may be available. The manufacturer,<br />

firmware version, and hardware version allow the management station to determine what equipment is in<br />

the field to facilitate preventive maintenance and upgrades. The TSS version allows the management<br />

station to properly communicate with the TSS.<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine basic information about the TSS, such as the<br />

sensor technology, manufacturer, model, firmware version, hardware version, TSS protocol version, and<br />

TSS standards revision.<br />

2.5.1.2 Determine TSS Capabilities<br />

The capabilities <strong>of</strong> the TSS are needed to determine how to configure and manage the TSS.<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine the capabilities <strong>of</strong> the TSS, such as the<br />

maximum number <strong>of</strong> zones, maximum number <strong>of</strong> historical data entries per zone, maximum number <strong>of</strong><br />

sample periods per zone, maximum number <strong>of</strong> outputs, maximum number <strong>of</strong> output groups, type <strong>of</strong><br />

occupancy used, maximum number <strong>of</strong> classes (subdivisions <strong>of</strong> collected data), maximum number <strong>of</strong><br />

characters for labels, availability <strong>of</strong> a Real Time Clock (RTC), and whether the RTC supports DST.<br />

2.5.1.2.1 Determine TSS Support for Sampling<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine if the TSS supports sampling. Support for the<br />

sampling feature indicates that the TSS is capable <strong>of</strong> collecting sample data and storing it for retrieval.<br />

2.5.1.2.2 Determine TSS Support for Timing<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine if the TSS supports timing functions. Support for<br />

the timing feature indicates that the TSS is capable <strong>of</strong> modifying the operation <strong>of</strong> zones and outputs<br />

through user-specified timing parameters.<br />

2.5.1.2.3 Determine TSS Support for Speed<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine if the TSS supports speed functions. Support<br />

for the speed feature indicates that the TSS is capable <strong>of</strong> providing (measuring or estimating) vehicle<br />

speed and storing it for retrieval through the sampling functions.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 14<br />

2.5.1.2.4 Determine TSS Support for Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine if the TSS supports an RTC. Support for the<br />

RTC feature indicates that the TSS is capable <strong>of</strong> providing actual local time.<br />

2.5.1.3 Determine the Sequence <strong>of</strong> Sample Periods<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine the sequence <strong>of</strong> sample periods so that<br />

aggregate data can be used to identify changes in traffic.<br />

2.5.1.4 Determine the Age <strong>of</strong> Sample Data<br />

This feature allows the management station to determine the age <strong>of</strong> sample period data so that the<br />

relevance <strong>of</strong> the data to current traffic conditions can be determined.<br />

2.5.1.5 Configure Zones<br />

This feature allows the management station to configure the sampling period, a sensing zone (e.g.,<br />

identifying label, number <strong>of</strong> classes, combination <strong>of</strong> multiple zones into a single zone, sequencing <strong>of</strong><br />

zones), and other zone options (e.g., enabled or disabled, fault detection thresholds). Also, this feature<br />

allows the management station to configure the paired zone settings (e.g., leading placement, trailing<br />

placement, method <strong>of</strong> estimating speed if one zone <strong>of</strong> the pair fails) that may be used in speed<br />

calculations within the TSS.<br />

This feature also allows for specific technologies <strong>of</strong> TSSs to have additional operational parameters. For<br />

inductive loops, this would include additional parameters such as sensitivity mode, sensitivity, and<br />

frequency setting.<br />

2.5.1.6 Configure Arming Enables<br />

This feature allows the management station to configure the Arming Enables that are used to modify an<br />

output and its delay and extension timing (e.g., Arming Pins, Arming Input Bits).<br />

NOTE—Previously, some detection devices provided inputs that could be used to modify the operation <strong>of</strong><br />

the detection device. These modifications usually dealt with delay and extension timing and were referred<br />

to in many ways (phase green inputs, delay inhibits, green inputs, etc.). A typical use <strong>of</strong> these inputs<br />

would be a right turn only lane that allows right turn on red at a signalized intersection. The input would<br />

be controlled by the green for the phase that would be active when the right turn lane would have a green<br />

display. The detection device for the right turn lane would then be programmed to have some amount <strong>of</strong><br />

delay. This would keep the traffic controller from receiving a detection from vehicles that arrived and then<br />

turned right on red unless a vehicle stayed in the right turn lane for at least the delay time. When the<br />

phase for the right turn is green, the delay needs to be turned <strong>of</strong>f so that the phase can extend correctly.<br />

Arming Enables are a logical enhancement to these inputs to allow greater flexibility in the control and the<br />

use <strong>of</strong> these inputs. Arming Enables are made up <strong>of</strong> Arming Pins and Arming Input Bits. Arming Pins are<br />

the physical inputs into the TSS, and Arming Input Bits are external status that are reported to the TSS<br />

using this protocol. For features that use Arming Enables, the ON or the OFF state <strong>of</strong> each Arming<br />

Enable can be used to activate a feature. Arming Enables that do not have an ON or OFF state set as an<br />

enable are ignored. If the Arming Pin inputs are dc, then a low input is an ON and a high input is an OFF.<br />

If the Arming Pin inputs are ac, then a low input is an OFF and a high input is an ON.<br />

2.5.1.7 Configure Outputs<br />

This feature allows the management station to configure the outputs to report the state <strong>of</strong> zones. (e.g.,<br />

assigning an output to a zone, conditioning <strong>of</strong> outputs to include delay and extension, assigning fail-safe /<br />

fail-secure mode <strong>of</strong> operation, force output on/<strong>of</strong>f).<br />

NOTE—The fail-safe or fail-secure modes <strong>of</strong> operation determine how a TSS outputs for a zone when it<br />

fails. In the fail-safe mode, the TSS outputs a constant detect during a zone failure. In the fail-secure<br />

mode, the TSS outputs a no detect during a zone failure.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 15<br />

2.5.1.8 Manage Pending Configuration File Name<br />

This feature allows the management station to transfer, validate, and execute a configuration file.<br />

2.5.2 Control the TSS<br />

The various sub-features for controlling the TSS include:<br />

a) Reset the TSS<br />

b) Initiate Sensor Diagnostics<br />

c) Synchronize the TSS<br />

d) Update Arming Input Bits <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

e) Manage the Camera<br />

f) Manage the RTC<br />

2.5.2.1 Reset the TSS<br />

This feature allows the management station to set the TSS to a known condition such as restart,<br />

reinitialize the user settings, or retune. This feature also allows a management station to cause the TSS<br />

to execute, abort, or validate a pending configuration file.<br />

2.5.2.2 Initiate Sensor Diagnostics<br />

This feature allows the operator to initiate sensor diagnostic routines.<br />

2.5.2.3 Synchronize the TSS<br />

This feature allows the TSS to set the baseline reference for the sampling period.<br />

2.5.2.4 Update Arming Input Bits <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

This feature allows a management station to update the status <strong>of</strong> the Arming Input Bits <strong>of</strong> the TSS.<br />

Arming input bits are updated so that the TSS can monitor external events without the need to physically<br />

connect an input <strong>of</strong> the TSS to a point that would allow it to monitor the desired event. This is especially<br />

desirable if the event to be monitored is not controlled at the same physical location as the TSS (e.g., the<br />

Red, Yellow, and Green states <strong>of</strong> a traffic signal, lane control signals, and preemption).<br />

2.5.2.5 Manage the Camera<br />

This feature allows a management station to enable or disable detection for a particular camera location.<br />

This feature would allow a camera that is normally used for detection to be disabled and then panned or<br />

zoomed to a new location for other uses such as surveillance. This feature also helps a management<br />

station verify that a camera is working and is pointing at the correct detection area. A management<br />

station can retrieve the original image used to set up the detection and compare it to a current image to<br />

verify a camera is properly aimed and has not moved. The image can be retrieved untouched to help<br />

diagnose camera issues or with the zone or zones overlaid to help verify camera aiming. The image may<br />

be available in different formats ranging from highest quality for images to be sent to the manufacturer for<br />

analysis to highly compressed to reduce bandwidth on the network and storage requirements to archive<br />

the image. To aid the management station, the TSS can associate a name with each <strong>of</strong> its cameras. This<br />

feature also allows the management station to determine the number <strong>of</strong> cameras and their video formats.<br />

This feature also allows a management station to command the camera to build an image file that can be<br />

transferred to a management station via FTP.<br />

2.5.2.6 Manage the Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

This feature allows a management station to configure an RTC for the purpose <strong>of</strong> providing a timestamp<br />

for sample data. The clock should be able to support Daylight Saving Time (DST) adjustments.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 16<br />

2.5.3 Monitor Current TSS Status<br />

The various sub-features for monitoring the current status <strong>of</strong> the TSS include:<br />

a) System Status<br />

b) Sensor Status<br />

c) Output States<br />

d) Zone Status<br />

2.5.3.1 Monitor System Status<br />

This feature allows the management station to monitor the system status <strong>of</strong> the TSS such that the<br />

management station identifies that the system is operating normally (the TSS has not identified a<br />

hardware or configuration error) or initializing.<br />

2.5.3.2 Monitor TSS Sensor Status<br />

This feature allows the management station to monitor the status <strong>of</strong> each sensor within the TSS. In<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, only the sensor status <strong>of</strong> inductive loop and machine vision sensors are defined.<br />

For inductive loops, this feature allows the operator to monitor inductance, frequency, inductance change,<br />

fault history, and fault count.<br />

For machine vision, this feature allows the operator to monitor video format, image reception diagnostics,<br />

and contrast loss, along with retrieving a snapshot to verify camera field <strong>of</strong> view (checking for camera<br />

movement/alignment issues).<br />

2.5.3.3 Monitor Output States<br />

This feature allows the management station to retrieve the states <strong>of</strong> multiple outputs <strong>of</strong> the TSS. The<br />

outputs need to be read <strong>of</strong>ten without overloading the communications link, and retrieving multiple<br />

outputs in the same action helps reduce the communications load.<br />

2.5.3.4 Monitor Zone Status<br />

This feature allows the management station to monitor the status <strong>of</strong> each zone.<br />

2.5.4 Collect Data from TSS<br />

The various sub-features for collecting data from the TSS include:<br />

a) Retrieve In-Progress Sample Data<br />

b) Retrieve Most Recently Completed Sample Data<br />

c) Retrieve Historical Sample Data<br />

2.5.4.1 Retrieve In-Progress Sample Data<br />

This feature allows the management station to obtain the data from the in-progress (started but not yet<br />

completed) sample period for use in identifying changes in traffic flow. This data includes the length <strong>of</strong><br />

elapsed time in the reported sample period, volume, percent <strong>of</strong> occupancy, speed, and zone status<br />

during the sampling period.<br />

NOTE—As a TSS may support the Boolean AND and OR operations to combine existing zones into a<br />

new virtual zone, the sample data reported by a virtual zone has limitations. If any AND logic is used,<br />

volume is the number <strong>of</strong> times that the output for the zone was activated. If just OR logic is used, volume<br />

is the additive total <strong>of</strong> the volumes <strong>of</strong> all <strong>of</strong> the zones that make up the virtual zone. Occupancy is the<br />

percent <strong>of</strong> time that the output for the zone was activated. Speed is reported as 65535 as it is not<br />

straightforward to calculate speed from logically combined zones. Zone Status only shows ‘OK’ if the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> all <strong>of</strong> the logically combined zones was ‘OK’ for the entire sample period. If any zone has a<br />

status other than ‘OK’ during the sample period, the last status other than ‘OK’ that is identified is the<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 17<br />

status reported.<br />

2.5.4.2 Retrieve Current Sample Data<br />

This feature allows the management station to obtain the data from the current sample period for use in<br />

identifying changes in traffic flow. This data includes when the sample period ended, volume, percent <strong>of</strong><br />

occupancy, speed, and zone status during the sampling period.<br />

2.5.4.3 Retrieve Historical Sample Data<br />

This feature allows the management station to retrieve historical sample data from previous sample<br />

periods for use in identifying changes in traffic flow. This is necessary to deal with communications<br />

failures and management station startup.<br />

2.5.5 Multi-Version Interoperability (MVI-Backward Compatibility)<br />

With the development and publication <strong>of</strong> newer versions <strong>of</strong> various <strong>NTCIP</strong> standards, the need to<br />

address and ensure multi-version interoperability (MVI-<strong>of</strong>ten referred to as ‘backward compatibility’ with a<br />

previous version, or interoperability to a defined extent with future versions) arises. Section 2.5.5<br />

provisions are designed to allow MVI.<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is newer than its predecessor, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005. In <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, some objects<br />

have been deprecated since <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005. It is important that these objects still be supported to<br />

provide interoperability with existing legacy systems. If the implementation does not require<br />

interoperability with existing legacy systems, then support for the deprecated objects is optional.<br />

NOTE—<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 is the predecessor <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. Since <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 did not<br />

include a major+minor version number as part <strong>of</strong> the document designation, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 is referred<br />

to as <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) or <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01.<br />

2.5.5.1 <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant<br />

This feature allows the management station to support objects in conformance with<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01.<br />

2.5.5.1.1 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Most Recent Sample Data<br />

This feature allows the management station to retrieve the most recent sample data from a TSS that is<br />

compliant with <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01.<br />

2.5.5.1.2 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data<br />

This feature allows the management station to retrieve historical sample data from previous sample<br />

periods from <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01 TSS for use in identifying changes in traffic flow.<br />

2.5.5.1.3 Loop Output Conditioning<br />

This feature allows a management station to configure for <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01 conformance.<br />

2.6 SECURITY<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 does not address any security issues. Any security pertaining to protecting the<br />

communications with a TSS should be implemented either physically by protecting the communications<br />

access points, or logically by enabling security features associated with the underlying communications<br />

protocols.<br />

2.7 OPERATIONAL POLICIES AND CONSTRAINTS/ASSUMPTIONS<br />

Operational policies are agency-specific and need to be determined and implemented by the agency<br />

operating the TSS. <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 does not cover this topic, but instead provides a set <strong>of</strong> common<br />

functions that can support an agency's operational policies.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 18<br />

If assumptions pertaining to the operations <strong>of</strong> a TSS have been made, they have been stated clearly at<br />

the locations where they apply.<br />

2.8 RELATIONSHIP TO THE NATIONAL ITS ARCHITECTURE FLOWS<br />

There are three National ITS Architecture Flows associated with the operation <strong>of</strong> a TSS. These are:<br />

a) Traffic Flow<br />

b) Traffic Sensor Control<br />

c) Roadway Equipment Coordination<br />

Each Architecture Flow is associated with one or more interfaces identified within the National ITS<br />

Architecture as:<br />

a) Between the TSS (Roadway Subsystem (RS)) and the Traffic Management Subsystem (TMS)<br />

b) Between the TSS (Roadway Subsystem (RS)) and Other Roadway Subsystem (ORS)<br />

The main user need groups (features), as identified previously, are related to the National ITS<br />

Architecture Flows as indicated in Table 1.<br />

Table 1 User Needs and National ITS Architecture Flows<br />

User Need Group Source Architecture Flow Destination<br />

Configure the Sensor TMS Traffic Sensor Control RS<br />

ORS Roadway Equipment Coordination RS<br />

RS Roadway Equipment Coordination ORS<br />

Monitor the Sensor TMS Traffic Sensor Control RS<br />

RS Traffic Flow TMS<br />

ORS Roadway Equipment Coordination ORS<br />

RS Roadway Equipment Coordination RS<br />

Retrieve Data RS Traffic Flow TMS<br />

ORS Roadway Equipment Coordination RS<br />

RS Roadway Equipment Coordination ORS<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 19<br />

Section 3<br />

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS<br />

[Normative]<br />

Section 3 defines the Functional Requirements based on the user needs identified in Section 2. Section 3<br />

includes:<br />

a) A tutorial<br />

b) The Protocol Requirements List (PRL)—A Functional Requirement is a requirement <strong>of</strong> a given<br />

function and therefore is only required to be implemented if the associated functionality (e.g., user<br />

need) is selected through the use <strong>of</strong> the PRL. The PRL also indicates which <strong>of</strong> the items are<br />

mandatory, conditional, or optional. The PRL can be used to specify the desired features <strong>of</strong> a TSS or<br />

can be used to document the features supported by a manufacturer’s implementation.<br />

c) Operational Environment Requirements—These requirements relate to the Operational Environment<br />

user needs defined in Section 2.4.2.<br />

d) Data Exchange Requirements—These are requirements related to the features identified in Section<br />

2.5 that can be realized through a data exchange. For example, this includes the requirement to be<br />

able to determine the output states <strong>of</strong> the TSS.<br />

Section 3 is intended for all readers, including:<br />

a) Transportation operations managers<br />

b) Transportation operations personnel<br />

c) Transportation engineers<br />

d) System integrators<br />

e) Manufacturers<br />

Section 3 is useful to the first three categories <strong>of</strong> readers useful to understand the details <strong>of</strong> TSS<br />

requirements. Section 3.2.8 is particularly useful in preparing agency specifications, and the PRL enables<br />

mapping from its rows to more detailed text in other sections.<br />

For the last two categories <strong>of</strong> readers, Section 3 is useful to fully understand what is required <strong>of</strong><br />

equipment conformant with <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 as an interface. Section 3.2.8 may also be used to<br />

document the capabilities <strong>of</strong> particular TSS implementation.<br />

3.1 TUTORIAL [INFORMATIVE]<br />

Section 3 defines the requirements that are intended to fulfill the user needs identified in Section 2. This<br />

is achieved through a PRL that traces each user need to one or more requirements. The details <strong>of</strong> each<br />

requirement are then presented following the PRL. Functional requirements are presented in three broad<br />

categories as follows:<br />

a) Architectural Requirements—These requirements define the required behavior <strong>of</strong> the system in<br />

exchanging data across the communications interface, including any restrictions to general<br />

architectural requirements, based on the architectural needs identified in Section 2.<br />

b) Data Exchange Requirements—These requirements define the required behavior <strong>of</strong> the system in<br />

exchanging data across the communications interface based upon the features identified in Section<br />

2.<br />

c) Supplemental Requirements—These requirements define additional requirements <strong>of</strong> the system that<br />

are derived from the architectural and/or data exchange requirements but are not themselves<br />

architectural or data exchange requirements. A given supplemental requirement may relate to<br />

multiple architectural and/or data exchange requirements. Supplemental requirements frequently<br />

include range capabilities <strong>of</strong> the equipment (e.g., how many sample periods is a TSS required to<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 20<br />

support).<br />

3.2 PROTOCOL REQUIREMENTS LIST (PRL)<br />

The PRL, provided in the table in Section 3.2.8, maps the user needs defined in Section 2 to the<br />

requirements defined in Section 3. The PRL can be used to:<br />

a) Indicate which requirements are to be implemented in a project-specific implementation.<br />

b) (As a checklist) to reduce the risk <strong>of</strong> failure to conform to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 through oversight.<br />

c) Provide a detailed indication <strong>of</strong> the capabilities <strong>of</strong> the implementation.<br />

d) (As a basis) to initially check the potential interoperability with another implementation.<br />

3.2.1 User Needs Column<br />

The PRL is based on the user needs defined in Section 2. The section number and user need name are<br />

indicated in this column.<br />

3.2.2 Requirements Column<br />

The PRL provides traceability by identifying the requirements defined in Section 3 that are associated<br />

with the user needs. The section number and functional requirement name are indicated in this column.<br />

3.2.3 Conformance Column<br />

The following notations and symbols are used to indicate status and conditional status in the PRL in all<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> standards. Not all <strong>of</strong> these notations and symbols may be used <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

3.2.3.1 Status Symbols<br />

The symbols in Table 2 are used to indicate status.<br />

Symbol<br />

M<br />

M.#<br />

O<br />

O.#<br />

C<br />

N/A<br />

X<br />

Table 2 Status Symbols<br />

Status<br />

Mandatory<br />

Support <strong>of</strong> every item <strong>of</strong> the group labeled by the<br />

same numeral # required, but only one is active at<br />

a time<br />

Optional<br />

Part <strong>of</strong> an option group. Support <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong><br />

items indicated by the '(range)' is required from all<br />

options labeled with the same numeral #<br />

Conditional<br />

Not applicable (i.e., logically impossible in the<br />

scope <strong>of</strong> the standard)<br />

Excluded or prohibited<br />

The O.# (range) notation is used to show a set <strong>of</strong> selectable options (e.g., O.2(1..*) would indicate that<br />

one or more <strong>of</strong> the option group 2 options shall be implemented). Two character combinations are used<br />

for dynamic requirements. In this case, the first character refers to the static (implementation) status, and<br />

the second refers to the dynamic (use); thus, ‘MO’ means ‘mandatory to be implemented, optional to be<br />

used.’<br />

3.2.3.2 Conditional Status Notation<br />

The predicate notations in Table 3 may be used.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 21<br />

Predicate<br />

:<br />

::<br />

(predicate)<br />

Table 3 Predicate Notations<br />

Notation<br />

This notation introduces a single item that is conditional on the<br />

.<br />

This notation introduces a table or a group <strong>of</strong> tables, all <strong>of</strong> which are<br />

conditional on the .<br />

This notation introduces the first occurrence <strong>of</strong> the predicate. The<br />

feature associated with this notation is the base feature for all<br />

options that have this predicate in their conformance column.<br />

The : notation means that the status following it applies only when the PRL states that the<br />

feature or features identified by the predicate are supported. In the simplest case, is the<br />

identifying tag <strong>of</strong> a single PRL item. The :: notation may precede a table or group <strong>of</strong> tables in<br />

a section or subsection. When the group predicate is true, then the associated section shall be included.<br />

The symbol also may be a Boolean expression composed <strong>of</strong> several indices. ‘AND’, ‘OR’,<br />

and ‘NOT’ shall be used to indicate the Boolean logical operations.<br />

Table 4 maps the predicates used in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 to its sections.<br />

Table 4 Predicate to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 Section Mapping<br />

Predicate<br />

Section<br />

Loop (Inductive Loop) Indicates that the PRL item applies to Inductive Loops as<br />

identified by Section 2.5.1.1<br />

Video (Machine Vision) Indicates that the PRL item applies to Machine Vision as<br />

identified by Section 2.5.1.1<br />

RTC (Real Time Clock) Indicates that the PRL item applies to RTCs as identified by<br />

Section 2.5.1.2.4<br />

Speed<br />

Indicates that the PRL item applies to Speed as identified by<br />

Section 2.5.1.2.3<br />

Timing<br />

Indicates that the PRL item applies to Timing as identified by<br />

Section 2.5.1.2.2<br />

Sample<br />

Indicates that the PRL item applies to Sampling as identified by<br />

Section 2.5.1.2.1<br />

Version01 or Version1 Indicates that the PRL item applies to objects required to<br />

maintain MVI with <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01 as identified by<br />

Section 2.5.5.1<br />

3.2.4 Support / Project Requirements Column<br />

The support column can be used in an agency specification to identify the required features for a specific<br />

implementation or by an implementer to identify which features have been implemented. In either case,<br />

the user circles the appropriate answer (Yes, No, or N/A) in the support column. See Table 5.<br />

Table 5 Support / Project Requirement Column Entries<br />

Entry<br />

Identifier<br />

Yes<br />

Supported by the implementation<br />

No<br />

Not supported by the implementation<br />

N/A<br />

Not applicable<br />

3.2.5 Additional Specifications Column<br />

The ‘Additional Specifications’ column may be used in an agency specification to provide additional notes<br />

and requirements for the specified implementation, or may be used by an implementer to provide any<br />

additional details about the implementation. In some cases, default text may already exist in this column,<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 22<br />

which the user should complete to fully specify the equipment. However, additional text can be added to<br />

this field as needed to fully specify a feature.<br />

3.2.6 Instructions for Completing the PRL<br />

In the 'Project Requirements' column, each response shall be either selected from the indicated set <strong>of</strong><br />

responses (e.g., Yes / No / N/A), or entered as indicated.<br />

If a conditional requirement is inapplicable, use the Not Applicable (N/A) choice. If a mandatory<br />

requirement is not satisfied, exception information shall be supplied by entering a reference Xi, where i is<br />

a unique identifier, to an accompanying rationale for the non-conformance. When the status is expressed<br />

as a two-character combination (as defined in Section 3.2.3.1), the response shall address each element<br />

<strong>of</strong> the requirement; e.g., for the requirement ‘mo’, the possible compliant responses are ‘yy’ or ‘yn.’<br />

3.2.7 Conformance Definition<br />

To claim ‘Conformance’ to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, the TSS shall minimally satisfy the mandatory requirements<br />

as identified in the PRL table. In addition, a conformant TSS may <strong>of</strong>fer additional (optional) features, as<br />

long as they are conformant with the requirements <strong>of</strong> this standard and the standards it references.<br />

NOTE—‘Conformance’ to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 should not be confused with ‘compliance’ to an agency<br />

specification. <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 is as broad as possible to allow a very simple TSS to be ‘conformant’ to<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. An agency specification needs to identify the requirements <strong>of</strong> a particular project and<br />

needs to require support for those requirements. An agency specification should match the requirements<br />

<strong>of</strong> a project with the corresponding requirements defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 to achieve interoperability.<br />

This means that functions and requirements defined as ‘optional’ in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 might need to be<br />

selected in an agency specification (in effect made ‘mandatory’).<br />

A conformant TSS may <strong>of</strong>fer additional features, as long as they are conformant with the requirements <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 and requirements contained in other standards that <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 references (i.e.,<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 2301 v02, and <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v01). For example, a TSS may support data that has not been defined<br />

by <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02; however, when exchanged via one <strong>of</strong> the <strong>NTCIP</strong> 2301 v02 protocols, the data shall<br />

be properly registered with a valid OBJECT IDENTIFIER under the Global ISO Naming Tree.<br />

NOTE—Off-the-shelf interoperability and interchangeability can only be obtained through welldocumented<br />

features broadly supported by the industry as a whole. Designing a system that uses<br />

features not defined in a standard or not typically deployed in combination with one another inhibits the<br />

goals <strong>of</strong> interoperability and interchangeability, especially if the documentation <strong>of</strong> these features is not<br />

available for distribution to system integrators. <strong>Standard</strong>s allow the use <strong>of</strong> additional features to support<br />

innovation, which is consistently needed in the industry, but users should be aware <strong>of</strong> the risks involved<br />

with using such features.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 23<br />

3.2.8 Protocol Requirements List (PRL) Table<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

2.4 Architectural Needs<br />

2.4.1 Fundamental Needs Driving TSS Deployment<br />

2.4.2 Operational Environment<br />

2.4.2.1 Live Data Exchange<br />

3.3.1.1 Retrieve Data M Yes<br />

3.3.1.2 Deliver Data M Yes<br />

3.3.1.3 Data Retrieval and Data M Yes<br />

Delivery Action Performance<br />

2.4.2.2 Support Batched Off-Line Data Logs<br />

3.3.2.1 Retrieve Historical Sample Data Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5 Features<br />

2.5.1 Configure the TSS<br />

2.5.1.1 Determine the TSS Identity<br />

3.4.1.1.1<br />

(Loop)<br />

(Video)<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

Determine Sensor Technology M Yes If the sensor technology<br />

indicates that it is Inductive<br />

Loop, then the predicate ‘Loop’<br />

is true and conformance should<br />

include those requirements<br />

indicated by the Loop predicate.<br />

If the sensor technology<br />

indicates Machine Vision, then<br />

the predicate ‘Video’ is true and<br />

conformance should include<br />

those requirements indicated by<br />

the Video predicate.<br />

3.4.1.1.2 Determine Manufacturer M Yes<br />

3.4.1.1.3 Determine Model M Yes<br />

3.4.1.1.4 Determine Firmware Version M Yes<br />

3.4.1.1.5 Determine Hardware Version M Yes<br />

3.4.1.1.6 Determine Protocol Version M Yes<br />

3.4.1.1.7 Determine <strong>Standard</strong>s Revision<br />

Version<br />

2.5.1.2 Determine TSS Capabilities<br />

3.4.1.2.1 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong><br />

Sensor Zones<br />

3.4.1.2.2 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong><br />

Historical Data Entries per<br />

Sensor Zone<br />

3.4.1.2.3 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> M<br />

Outputs<br />

3.4.1.2.4 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> M<br />

Output Groups<br />

3.4.1.2.5 Determine Type <strong>of</strong> Occupancy M<br />

Used<br />

3.4.1.2.6 Determine Availability <strong>of</strong> a Real M<br />

Time Clock (RTC)<br />

3.4.1.2.7 Determine if Real Time Clock M<br />

(RTC) Supports Daylight Saving<br />

Time (DST)<br />

M<br />

M<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 24<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

2.5.1.2.1<br />

(Sample)<br />

2.5.1.2.2<br />

(Timing)<br />

2.5.1.2.3<br />

(Speed)<br />

2.5.1.2.4<br />

(RTC)<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

3.4.1.2.8 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Classes<br />

3.4.1.2.9 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> M Yes<br />

Characters for Labels<br />

3.4.1.2.10 Determine Optional Features M Yes<br />

Determine TSS Support for Sampling<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

3.4.1.2.10 Determine Optional Features M Yes If the features indicate that<br />

support for Sampling is required,<br />

then the predicate ‘Sample’ is<br />

true and conformance should<br />

include those requirements<br />

indicated by the Sample<br />

predicate.<br />

Determine TSS Support for Timing<br />

3.4.1.2.10 Determine Optional Features M Yes If the features indicate that<br />

support for Timing is required,<br />

then the predicate ‘Timing’ is<br />

true and conformance should<br />

include those requirements<br />

indicated by the Timing<br />

predicate.<br />

Determine TSS Support for Speed<br />

3.4.1.2.10 Determine Optional Features M Yes If the features indicate that<br />

support for Speed is required,<br />

then the predicate ‘Speed’ is<br />

true and conformance should<br />

include those requirements<br />

indicated by the Speed<br />

predicate.<br />

2.5.1.2.4 Determine TSS Support for Real Time Clock<br />

(RTC)<br />

3.4.1.2.6 Determine Availability <strong>of</strong> a Real<br />

Time Clock (RTC)<br />

2.5.1.3 Determine the Sequence <strong>of</strong> Sample Periods<br />

3.4.3.1.6 Get Historical Sequence<br />

Number<br />

M Yes If the features indicate that<br />

support for Real Time Clock<br />

(RTC) is required, then the<br />

predicate ‘RTC’ is true and<br />

conformance should include<br />

those requirements indicated by<br />

the RTC predicate.<br />

Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5.1.4 Determine the Age <strong>of</strong> Sample Data<br />

3.4.3.1.1 Get Historical Sample End Time Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5.1.5 Configure Zones<br />

3.4.1.5.1 Get Zone Options M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.2 Get Zone Options Status M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.3 Get Zone Sample Period Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.4 Get Zone Label O Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.5.5 Get Zone Boolean AND Zones O Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.5.6 Get Zone Boolean OR Zones O Yes/No<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 25<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

3.4.1.5.7 Set Zone Options M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.8 Set Zone Sample Period Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.9 Set Zone Label O Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.5.10 Set Zone Boolean AND Zones O Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.5.11 Set Zone Boolean OR Zones O Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.5.12 Get Paired Zone Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.13 Get Paired Zone Options Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.14 Get Paired Zone Spacing Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.15 Get Speed Correction Factor Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.16 Set Paired Zone Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.17 Set Paired Zone Options Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.18 Set Paired Zone Spacing Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.19 Set Speed Correction Factor Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.20 Get Sensor Zone Average Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Vehicle Length<br />

3.4.1.5.21 Get Sensor Zone Length Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.22 Set Sensor Zone Average Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Vehicle Length<br />

3.4.1.5.23 Set Sensor Zone Length Speed:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.24 Get Sensor Zone Loop Layout Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.25 Set Sensor Zone Loop Layout Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.26 Set Zone Sensitivity Mode Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.27 Set Zone Sensitivity Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.28 Set Sensor Zone Frequency Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Range<br />

3.4.1.5.29 Get Zone Sensitivity Mode Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.30 Get Zone Sensitivity Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.31 Get Sensor Zone Frequency Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Range<br />

3.4.1.5.32 Get Zone Output Mode M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.33 Get Output Max Presence Time Timing:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.34 Get Output Delay Time Timing:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.35 Get Output Extension Time Timing:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.36 Set Zone Output Mode M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.37 Set Output Max Presence Time Timing:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.38 Set Output Delay Time Timing:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.39 Set Output Delay Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.40 Set Output Extension Time Timing:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.41 Set Output Extension Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.42 Get Output Delay Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.43 Set Output Delay Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.44 Get Output Extension Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.45 Set Output Extension Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.46 Get Zone Output Sequenced Timing:O Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.47 Set Zone Output Sequenced Timing:O Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.48 Get Output Delay Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.49 Get Output Extension Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.50 Get No Activity Fault Time M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.51 Get Max Presence Fault Time M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.52 Get Erratic Counts Fault Time M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.53 Get Erratic Counts Threshold M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.54 Set No Activity Fault Time M Yes<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 26<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

3.4.1.5.55 Set Max Presence Fault Time M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.56 Set Erratic Counts Fault Time M Yes<br />

3.4.1.5.57 Set Erratic Counts Threshold M Yes<br />

2.5.1.6 Configure Arming Enables<br />

3.4.1.3.11 Get External Arming Inputs Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.3.12 Set External Arming Inputs Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.39 Set Output Delay Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.41 Set Output Extension Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.48 Get Output Delay Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.5.49 Get Output Extension Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.6.9 Get Output Arming Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.6.11 Set Output Arming Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

2.5.1.7 Configure Outputs<br />

3.4.1.6.1 Get Ouput Sensor Zone M Yes<br />

3.4.1.6.2 Get Output Failsafe Mode M Yes<br />

3.4.1.6.3 Get Output Mode Status M Yes<br />

3.4.1.6.4 Get Output Label O Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.6.5 Set Output Sensor Zone M Yes<br />

3.4.1.6.6 Set Output Failsafe Mode M Yes<br />

3.4.1.6.7 Set Output Label M Yes<br />

3.4.1.6.8 Get Output Arming Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.6.9 Get Output Arming Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.6.10 Set Output Arming Enables Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.6.11 Set Output Arming Mode Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

2.5.1.8 Manage Pending Configuration File Name<br />

3.4.1.3.13 Set Pending Configuration File O.1 Yes/No<br />

Name<br />

3.4.1.3.14 Get Pending Configuration File O.1 Yes/No<br />

Name<br />

2.5.2 Control the TSS<br />

2.5.2.1 Reset the TSS<br />

3.4.1.3.1 Restart the TSS M Yes<br />

3.4.1.3.2 Reinitialize User Settings M Yes<br />

3.4.1.3.3 Restore Factory Defaults M Yes<br />

3.4.1.3.4. Retune M Yes<br />

3.4.1.3.8 Execute Pending Configuration O.1 Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.3.9 Abort Pending Configuration O.1 Yes/No<br />

3.4.1.3.10 Validate Pending Configuration O.1 Yes/No<br />

2.5.2.2 Initiate Sensor Diagnostics<br />

3.4.1.3.6 Short Diagnostics M Yes<br />

3.4.1.3.7 Full Diagnostics M Yes<br />

2.5.2.3 Synchronize the TSS<br />

3.4.1.3.5 Resynchronize Sampling<br />

Periods<br />

Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5.2.4 Update Arming Inputs <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

3.4.1.3.11 Get External Arming Inputs Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.3.12 Set External Arming Inputs Timing:O.3 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

2.5.2.5 Manage the Camera<br />

3.4.1.7.1 Set Disable Detection Video:O Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.2 Get Disable Detection Video:O Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.3 Set the Build Image Parameter Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.4 Set Cancel Build In-Progress Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 27<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

3.4.1.7.5 Get Baseline Image Status Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.6 Get Camera Image Formats Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

Supported<br />

3.4.1.7.7 Set Image Zone Number Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.8 Get Image Zone Number Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.9 Set Image Type Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.10 Get Image Type Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.11 Set Image Overlay Type Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.12 Get Image Overlay Type Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.13 Set Image Quality Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.14 Get Image Quality Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.15 Set Camera Image Format Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.16 Get Camera Image Format Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.17 Get Camera Name Label Video:O Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.18 Set Camera Name Label Video:O Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.7.19 Get Maximum Camera Count Video:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5.2.6 Manage Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

3.4.1.4.1 Get Date and Time RTC:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.4.2 Get Daylight Saving Time (DST) RTC:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Mode<br />

3.4.1.4.3 Set Date and Time RTC:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.1.4.4 Set Daylight Saving Time (DST) RTC:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Mode<br />

2.5.3 Monitor Current TSS Status<br />

2.5.3.1 Monitor System Status<br />

3.4.2.1 Get System Status M Yes<br />

2.5.3.2 Monitor TSS Sensor Status<br />

3.4.2.2.1 Get Zone Inductance Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.2 Get Zone Frequency Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.3 Get Zone Inductance Change Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.4 Get Zone Fault History Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.5 Get Zone Fault Count Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.6 Get Zone Status M Yes<br />

3.4.2.2.7 Get Image Reception Video:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Diagnostics<br />

3.4.2.2.8 Get Image Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.9 Get Zone List for Camera Video:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.2.2.10 Get Zone Percent Inductance Loop:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Change<br />

3.4.2.2.11 Get Image Status Video:O.2 Yes/No/ N/A<br />

2.5.3.3 Monitor Output States<br />

3.4.2.3.1 Get Output Group Output State M Yes<br />

2.5.3.4 Monitor Zone Status<br />

3.4.2.2.6 Get Zone Status M Yes<br />

2.5.4 Collect Data from TSS<br />

2.5.4.1 Retrieve In-Progress Sample Data<br />

3.4.3.1.1 Get Historical Sample End Time Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.2 Get Historical Sample Volume Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.3 Get Historical Sample Percent Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Occupancy<br />

3.4.3.1.4 Get Historical Sample Speed Sample:O<br />

Speed:M<br />

Yes/No/ N/A<br />

Yes/ N/A<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 28<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

3.4.3.1.5 Get Historical Sample Zone Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Status<br />

3.4.3.1.6 Get Historical Sequence Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Number<br />

3.4.3.1.7 Get Zone Class Label Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.8 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sample Data Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Entries<br />

3.4.3.1.9 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zone Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Classes<br />

2.5.4.2 Retrieve Current Sample Data<br />

3.4.3.1.1 Get Historical Sample End Time Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.2 Get Historical Sample Volume Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.3 Get Historical Sample Percent Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Occupancy<br />

3.4.3.1.4 Get Historical Sample Speed Sample:O<br />

Speed:M<br />

Yes/No/ N/A<br />

Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.5 Get Historical Sample Zone Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Status<br />

3.4.3.1.6 Get Historical Sequence Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Number<br />

3.4.3.1.7 Get Zone Class Label Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.8 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sample Data Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Entries<br />

3.4.3.1.9 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zone Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Classes<br />

2.5.4.3 Retrieve Historical Sample Data Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.1 Get Historical Sample End Time Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.2 Get Historical Sample Volume Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.3 Get Historical Sample Percent Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Occupancy<br />

3.4.3.1.4 Get Historical Sample Speed Sample:O<br />

Speed:M<br />

Yes/No/ N/A<br />

Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.5 Get Historical Sample Zone Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Status<br />

3.4.3.1.6 Get Historical Sequence Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Number<br />

3.4.3.1.7 Get Zone Class Label Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.4.3.1.8 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sample Data Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Entries<br />

3.4.3.1.9 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zone Sample:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Classes<br />

2.5.5 Multi-Version Interoperability (Backward Compatibility)<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 29<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

2.5.5.1<br />

(Version01)<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformance O Yes/No NOTE—Some objects defined in<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01)<br />

were deprecated and replaced<br />

by newer objects that have a<br />

wider scope or have other<br />

features to ease implementation.<br />

It is considered the default<br />

condition for <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005<br />

(version v01) objects to be<br />

required, the ‘Version1’<br />

predicate to be true, and<br />

conformance should include<br />

those requirements indicated by<br />

the Version1 predicate.<br />

If the user does not want<br />

conformance with <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01), then<br />

‘No’ should be in the project<br />

requirement column and the<br />

statement below shall be<br />

checked.<br />

2.5.5.1.1 Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Conformant Data Sample<br />

3.5.1.1 Get Sample End Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.1.2 Get Volume Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.1.3 Get Percent Occupancy Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.1.4 Get Speed Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.1.5 Get Zone Status Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5.5.1.2 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Historical Sample Data<br />

3.5.2.1 Get Sample End Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.2.2 Get Volume Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.2.3 Get Percent Occupancy Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.2.4 Get Speed Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.2.5 Get Zone Status Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

2.5.5.1.3 Loop Output Conditioning Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.1 Get Output Mode Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.2 Get Max Presence Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.3 Get Output Delay Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.4 Get Output Extend Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.5 Get Output Delay Enable Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.6 Get Output Extend Enable Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.7 Set Output Mode Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.8 Set Max Presence Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.9 Set Output Delay Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Place a checkmark here<br />

_______ if the TSS is NOT<br />

required to support backward<br />

compatibility with <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01).<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 30<br />

User Need<br />

Section Number<br />

User Need<br />

FR Section<br />

Number<br />

Functional Requirement<br />

Conformance<br />

Support / Project<br />

Requirement<br />

3.5.3.10 Set Output Extend Time Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.11 Set Output Delay Enable Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

3.5.3.12 Set Output Extend Enable Version1:M Yes/ N/A<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

3.3 OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS<br />

Requirements for communications capabilities follow.<br />

3.3.1 Support Live Data<br />

Requirements for specifying capabilities <strong>of</strong> a TSS to provide live data to a TSS management station<br />

follow.<br />

3.3.1.1 Retrieve Data<br />

The TSS shall allow the management stations to retrieve data from the sensor system.<br />

3.3.1.2 Deliver Data<br />

The TSS shall allow the management stations to deliver data (e.g., configuration data, commands, etc.)<br />

to the sensor system.<br />

3.3.1.3 Data Retrieval and Data Delivery Action Performance<br />

The TSS shall process SNMP Get/Set/GetNext commands in response to data retrieval and data delivery<br />

actions performed by the management stations on the TSS in accordance with the performance criteria<br />

for the SNMP commands established in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103 v02.<br />

3.3.2 Support Batched Data<br />

The following requirements define the functions needed to support the exchange <strong>of</strong> data between the<br />

TSS management station and the TSS in cases where the TSS is not sharing a live data connection with<br />

the management stations, but is instead storing data <strong>of</strong>fline for periodic retrieval by the management<br />

station.<br />

3.3.2.1 Retrieve Historical Sample Data<br />

The TSS shall allow the management stations to retrieve historical sample data from the sensor system.<br />

3.4 DATA EXCHANGE REQUIREMENTS<br />

The operation <strong>of</strong> a TSS has been categorized into three major areas:<br />

a) Manage the TSS configuration<br />

b) Monitor the current status <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

c) Retrieve historical sample data from the TSS<br />

In Section 2, each <strong>of</strong> these major areas was broken down into sub-items. The Data Exchange<br />

Requirements also follow this structure.<br />

3.4.1 Manage the TSS Configuration<br />

Requirements for managing TSS configuration follow.<br />

3.4.1.1 Identify TSS<br />

Requirements for identifying the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.1.1.1 Determine Sensor Technology<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine its sensor technology (such as inductive loop or<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 31<br />

video). This information can then be used to determine if this TSS supports additional data elements that<br />

are technology specific.<br />

3.4.1.1.2 Determine Manufacturer<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine its manufacturer. This shall be as defined in the<br />

Global Module Object in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.2.3. This information can be useful in creating a TSS<br />

physical inventory.<br />

3.4.1.1.3 Determine Model<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine its model. This shall be as defined in the Global<br />

Module Object in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.2.3. This information can be useful in creating a TSS<br />

physical inventory.<br />

3.4.1.1.4 Determine Firmware Version<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine its firmware version. This shall be as defined in<br />

the Global Module Object in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.2.3. This information can be useful in creating a<br />

TSS physical inventory or determining where firmware upgrades may be needed in the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.1.5 Determine Hardware Version<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine its hardware version. This shall be as defined in<br />

the Global Module Object in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.2.3. This information can be useful in creating a<br />

TSS physical inventories.<br />

3.4.1.1.6 Determine Protocol Version<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the TSS protocol version that it complies with.<br />

This shall be as defined in the Global Module Object in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.2.3. This information<br />

can then be used to determine the correct way <strong>of</strong> communicating with the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.1.7 Determine <strong>Standard</strong>s Revision Version<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the version <strong>of</strong> the TSS standard that it conforms<br />

to. This shall be as defined in the Global Module Object in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.2.3. This<br />

information can then be used to determine the correct way <strong>of</strong> communicating with the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.2 Determine TSS Capabilities<br />

Requirements for determining capabilities <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.1.2.1 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zones<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> sensor zones that the<br />

TSS supports. This information can then be used to ensure that the management station does not waste<br />

time querying the TSS for sensor zones that it does not support.<br />

3.4.1.2.2 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Historical Data Entries per Sensor Zone<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> historical data entries<br />

(sample periods) per sensor zone that the TSS supports. All sensor zones shall support the same<br />

number <strong>of</strong> sample periods.<br />

3.4.1.2.3 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Outputs<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> outputs that the TSS<br />

supports. This information can then be used to ensure that the management station does not waste time<br />

querying the TSS for outputs that it does not support.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 32<br />

3.4.1.2.4 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Output Groups<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> output groups that the<br />

TSS supports. This information can then be used to ensure that the management station does not waste<br />

time querying the TSS for output groups that it does not support.<br />

3.4.1.2.5 Determine Type <strong>of</strong> Occupancy Used<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the type <strong>of</strong> occupancy reported by the TSS. This<br />

information can be useful in determining the correct way to use the occupancy data provided by this TSS.<br />

3.4.1.2.6 Determine Availability <strong>of</strong> a Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine if the TSS has an RTC. This information can<br />

then be used to determine how to interpret End Time data that is returned for data collection items. If an<br />

RTC is available, the End Time is the actual date/time when the sample period ended. If an RTC is not<br />

available, the End Time is the elapsed time since the last power up or reset when the sample period<br />

ended.<br />

3.4.1.2.7 Determine if Real Time Clock (RTC) Supports Daylight Saving Time (DST)<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine if the TSS has an RTC that supports DST. This<br />

information can then be used to determine how to interpret End Time data that is returned for data<br />

collection items. If DST is supported, then the End Time is already correct and no further adjustment is<br />

needed to the returned End Time. If DST is not supported, then the End Time would need to be adjusted<br />

for DST if appropriate. If an RTC is not available, this item should always return DST as not supported.<br />

3.4.1.2.8 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Classes<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> classes that the TSS<br />

supports.<br />

3.4.1.2.9 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Characters for Labels<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> characters for labels<br />

that the TSS supports. This information can then be used to ensure that the management station does<br />

not try to send labels that are too long for the TSS to receive.<br />

3.4.1.2.10 Determine Optional Features<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine which optional features, if any, that the TSS<br />

supports. This information can then be used to ensure that the management station does not try to use<br />

features that are not supported by the TSS. The currently supported optional features are sampling,<br />

timing, and speed.<br />

3.4.1.3 Control the TSS<br />

Requirements for resetting and synchronizing the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.1.3.1 Restart the TSS<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to perform a restart that resets<br />

and initializes the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the most recent initialization to zero. This command shall<br />

perform the same function as cycling power to the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.3.2 Reinitialize User Settings<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to reinitialize the user settings to<br />

their user-defined defaults and flush all historical data.<br />

3.4.1.3.3 Restore Factory Defaults<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to reset all settings to preset<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 33<br />

factory defaults.<br />

3.4.1.3.4 Retune<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to perform a retune (recalibrate<br />

unit background settings) for all zones without resetting or flushing <strong>of</strong> any historical data.<br />

3.4.1.3.5 Resynchronize Sampling Periods<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to synchronize all sampling<br />

period clocks within one second <strong>of</strong> receiving the command. This command is only needed in TSSs that<br />

do not support an RTC. This command shall cause the TSS to end all sample periods in-progress, reset<br />

and initialize the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the most recent initialization to zero, and start the next<br />

sampling period.<br />

3.4.1.3.6 Short Diagnostics<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to perform a vendor-specific short<br />

diagnostic test. This command shall cause the TSS to go through an abbreviated vendor-specific<br />

diagnostic routine, which may be the same as full diagnostics for some vendors.<br />

3.4.1.3.7 Full Diagnostics<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to cause the sensor system to perform a vendor-specific full<br />

diagnostic test. This command shall cause the TSS to go through a complete vendor-specific diagnostic<br />

routine, which may be the same as short diagnostics for some vendors, causing a reset and initialization<br />

<strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the most recent initialization to a value <strong>of</strong> zero.<br />

3.4.1.3.8 Execute Pending Configuration<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to execute the current uploaded configuration changes that<br />

may result in a system reboot, system reinitialization, and a loss <strong>of</strong> historical data.<br />

3.4.1.3.9 Abort Pending Configuration<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to abort the currently pending configuration changes. This<br />

command shall not result in a system reboot, system reinitialization, or loss <strong>of</strong> historical data.<br />

3.4.1.3.10 Validate Pending Configuration<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to check the pending configuration file to ensure that it is a<br />

valid configuration file.<br />

3.4.1.3.11 Get External Arming Inputs<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station or other device capable <strong>of</strong> using this protocol to determine the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> the external arming inputs that the TSS supports. This information can then be used to verify<br />

that the external arming inputs are being activated correctly.<br />

3.4.1.3.12 Set External Arming Inputs<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station or other device capable <strong>of</strong> using this protocol to individually<br />

set or clear the states <strong>of</strong> the external arming inputs that the TSS supports. This information can then be<br />

used to modify the operating characteristics <strong>of</strong> the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.3.13 Set Pending Configuration File Name<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the file name <strong>of</strong> the file to be used as the next<br />

configuration file for the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.3.14 Get Pending Configuration File Name<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the file name <strong>of</strong> the file to be used as the next<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 34<br />

configuration file for the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.4 Manage Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

Requirements for managing RTC <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.1.4.1 Get Date and Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the current sensor system date and time. The sensor<br />

date and time shall be defined in accordance with the Global Time Object defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03<br />

Section 2.4.1.<br />

3.4.1.4.2 Get Daylight Saving Time (DST) Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the current DST mode. The current DST mode shall be<br />

defined in accordance with the Global Daylight Saving Object defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.4.2.<br />

3.4.1.4.3 Set Date and Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the sensor system date and time to within one second<br />

<strong>of</strong> receiving the command. The current date and time shall be defined in accordance with the Global Time<br />

Object defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.4.1.<br />

3.4.1.4.4 Set Daylight Saving Time (DST) Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the DST mode. The current time value shall be defined<br />

in accordance with the Global Daylight Saving Object defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Section 2.4.2.<br />

3.4.1.5 Manage Sensor Zones<br />

Requirements for managing sensor zones <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.1.5.1 Get Zone Options<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the value <strong>of</strong> the last ‘Set Zone Options’<br />

command.<br />

3.4.1.5.2 Get Zone Options Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current status <strong>of</strong> zone options.<br />

3.4.1.5.3 Get Zone Sample Period<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the sample period length for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.4 Get Zone Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the label assigned to a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.5 Get Zone Boolean AND Zones<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the zones a Boolean AND operation is<br />

performed on for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.6 Get Zone Boolean OR Zones<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the zones a Boolean OR operation is performed<br />

on for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.7 Set Zone Options<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set zone options.<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 35<br />

3.4.1.5.8 Set Zone Sample Period<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the sample period <strong>of</strong> a zone in one minute increments.<br />

3.4.1.5.9 Set Zone Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to assign a label to a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.10 Set Zone Boolean AND Operator<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the zones a Boolean AND operation is performed on for<br />

a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.11 Set Zone Boolean OR Operator<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the zones a Boolean OR operation is performed on for<br />

a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.12 Get Paired Zone<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the Paired Zone for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.13 Get Paired Zone Options<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the Paired Zone Options for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.14 Get Paired Zone Spacing<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the Paired Zone Spacing between a zone and its<br />

paired zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.15 Get Speed Correction Factor<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the Speed Correction Factor for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.16 Set Paired Zone<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the Paired Zone for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.17 Set Paired Zone Options<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the Paired Zone Options for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.18 Set Paired Zone Spacing<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the Paired Zone Spacing between a zone and its paired<br />

zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.19 Set Speed Correction Factor<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the Speed Correction Factor for a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.20 Get Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length.<br />

3.4.1.5.21 Get Sensor Zone Length<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the Sensor Zone Length.<br />

3.4.1.5.22 Set Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 36<br />

3.4.1.5.23 Set Sensor Zone Length<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the Sensor Zone Length.<br />

3.4.1.5.24 Get Sensor Zone Loop Layout<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the zone configuration <strong>of</strong> a TSS zone. This<br />

information can then be used to ensure that the correct zone configuration has been set for each zone <strong>of</strong><br />

the TSS.<br />

3.4.1.5.25 Set Sensor Zone Loop Layout<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the zone configuration <strong>of</strong> a TSS zone. This information<br />

can be used by the TSS to determine how to use the information being received from the zone sensor.<br />

3.4.1.5.26 Set Zone Sensitivity Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the current sensitivity mode <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.27 Set Zone Sensitivity<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the current sensitivity <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.28 Set Sensor Zone Frequency Range<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the frequency range for a sensor zone <strong>of</strong> a TSS.<br />

3.4.1.5.29 Get Zone Sensitivity Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current sensitivity mode <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.30 Get Zone Sensitivity<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current sensitivity <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.1.5.31 Get Sensor Zone Frequency Range<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the frequency range for a sensor zone <strong>of</strong> a TSS.<br />

3.4.1.5.32 Get Zone Output Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the current mode <strong>of</strong> output.<br />

3.4.1.5.33 Get Output Max Presence Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the output max presence time.<br />

3.4.1.5.34 Get Output Delay Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the output delay time.<br />

3.4.1.5.35 Get Output Extension Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the output extension time.<br />

3.4.1.5.36 Set Zone Output Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output mode.<br />

3.4.1.5.37 Set Output Max Presence Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the max presence time.<br />

3.4.1.5.38 Set Output Delay Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output delay time.<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 37<br />

3.4.1.5.39 Set Output Delay Enables<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output delay enables.<br />

3.4.1.5.40 Set Output Extension Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output extension time.<br />

3.4.1.5.41 Set Output Extension Enables<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output extension enables.<br />

3.4.1.5.42 Get Output Delay Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the output delay mode.<br />

3.4.1.5.43 Set Output Delay Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output delay mode.<br />

3.4.1.5.44 Get Output Extension Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the output extension mode.<br />

3.4.1.5.45 Set Output Extension Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output extension mode.<br />

3.4.1.5.46 Get Zone Output Sequenced<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine if a zone output is operating in the sequenced<br />

mode and with which zone it is sequenced.<br />

3.4.1.5.47 Set Zone Output Sequenced<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set a zone output to operate in the sequenced mode and<br />

with which zone it is sequenced.<br />

3.4.1.5.48 Get Output Delay Enables<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the output delay enables.<br />

3.4.1.5.49 Get Output Extension Enables<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the output extension enables.<br />

3.4.1.5.50 Get No Activity Fault Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the time that a zone is required to go without<br />

activity to generate a No Activity fault.<br />

3.4.1.5.51 Get Max Presence Fault Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the time that a zone goes with continuous<br />

activity to generate a Max Presence fault.<br />

3.4.1.5.52 Get Erratic Counts Fault Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the time that, if a zone’s number <strong>of</strong> actuations<br />

meets or exceeds the Erratic Counts Threshold, an Erratic Counts fault is generated.<br />

3.4.1.5.53 Get Erratic Counts Threshold<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the counts that, if a zone’s number <strong>of</strong> actuations<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 38<br />

meets or exceeds within the Erratic Counts Fault Time, an Erratic Counts fault is generated.<br />

3.4.1.5.54 Set No Activity Fault Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the time that a zone goes without activity to generate a<br />

No Activity fault.<br />

3.4.1.5.55 Set Max Presence Fault Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the time that a zone goes with continuous activity to<br />

generate a Max Presence fault.<br />

3.4.1.5.56 Set Erratic Counts Fault Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the time that, if a zone’s number <strong>of</strong> actuations meets or<br />

exceeds the Erratic Counts Threshold, an Erratic Counts fault is generated.<br />

3.4.1.5.57 Set Erratic Counts Threshold<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the counts that, if a zone’s number <strong>of</strong> actuations meets<br />

or exceeds within the Erratic Counts Fault Time, an Erratic Counts fault is generated.<br />

3.4.1.6 Manage Outputs<br />

Requirements for managing outputs <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.1.6.1 Get Output Sensor Zone<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the sensor zone assigned to an output.<br />

3.4.1.6.2 Get Output Failsafe Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the last fail-safe mode command.<br />

3.4.1.6.3 Get Output Mode Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current output mode status <strong>of</strong> an output.<br />

3.4.1.6.4 Get Output Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the label assigned to an output.<br />

3.4.1.6.5 Set Output Sensor Zone<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the sensor zone assigned to an output.<br />

3.4.1.6.6 Set Output Failsafe Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set a fail-safe mode for an output.<br />

3.4.1.6.7 Set Output Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to assign a label to an output.<br />

3.4.1.6.8 Get Output Arming Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to get the output arming mode.<br />

3.4.1.6.9 Set Output Arming Enables<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output Arming Enables.<br />

3.4.1.6.10 Set Output Arming Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the output arming mode.<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 39<br />

3.4.1.6.11 Get Output Arming Enables<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the Arming Enables.<br />

3.4.1.7 Manage Camera<br />

Requirements for managing a TSS camera follow.<br />

3.4.1.7.1 Set Disable Detection<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to enable/disable detection on a camera if it is to be used for<br />

another purpose, such as surveillance, that requires changing its zoom setting.<br />

3.4.1.7.2 Get Disable Detection<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current detection status <strong>of</strong> a camera.<br />

3.4.1.7.3 Set the Build Image Parameter<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to instruct the TSS to build an image for FTP transfer.<br />

3.4.1.7.4 Set Cancel Build In-Progress<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to instruct the TSS to cancel an in-progress build <strong>of</strong> an image<br />

for FTP transfer.<br />

3.4.1.7.5 Get Baseline Image Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine if a baseline image is supported and if a<br />

baseline image is available.<br />

3.4.1.7.6 Get Camera Image Formats Supported<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the image formats supported.<br />

3.4.1.7.7 Set Image Zone Number<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the zone that determines which camera's image is built.<br />

If a TSS contains multiple cameras, the TSS uses this parameter to determine which camera to use to<br />

build the image. The image built contains the zone specified here.<br />

3.4.1.7.8 Get Image Zone Number<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the zone that determines which camera's image<br />

is built.<br />

3.4.1.7.9 Set Image Type<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the type <strong>of</strong> image to be built. There are currently two<br />

supported options: snapshot or baseline.<br />

3.4.1.7.10 Get Image Type<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the type <strong>of</strong> image to be built.<br />

3.4.1.7.11 Set Image Overlay Type<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the overlay to be added to the image to be built. The<br />

currently supported options are: none, this zone, all zones, or the default overlay.<br />

3.4.1.7.12 Get Image Overlay Type<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the overlay to be added to the image to be built.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 40<br />

3.4.1.7.13 Set Image Quality<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set the quality <strong>of</strong> the image to be built.<br />

3.4.1.7.14 Get Image Quality<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the quality <strong>of</strong> the image to be built.<br />

3.4.1.7.15 Set Camera Image Format<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to set which format is used for the image to be built.<br />

3.4.1.7.16 Get Camera Image Format<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine which format is used for the image to be built.<br />

3.4.1.7.17 Get Camera Name Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the Name (Label) assigned to a camera.<br />

3.4.1.7.18 Set Camera Name Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to assign a Name (Label) to a camera.<br />

3.4.1.7.19 Get Maximum Camera Count<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the maximum number <strong>of</strong> cameras that the TSS<br />

supports. This information can then be used to ensure that the management station does not waste time<br />

querying the TSS for cameras that it does not support.<br />

3.4.2 Monitor the Current Status<br />

Requirements for monitoring the current status <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.2.1 Get System Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the overall status <strong>of</strong> the TSS.<br />

3.4.2.2 TSS Sensor Status<br />

Requirements for monitoring sensors <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.2.2.1 Get Zone Inductance<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current inductance <strong>of</strong> the loop/lead-in<br />

network for a zone.<br />

3.4.2.2.2 Get Zone Frequency<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the current operating frequency <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.2.2.3 Get Zone Inductance Change<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the change in inductance <strong>of</strong> a zone. This value<br />

shall be in nanoHenries.<br />

3.4.2.2.4 Get Zone Fault History<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the fault history <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.2.2.5 Get Zone Fault Count<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the fault count <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 41<br />

3.4.2.2.6 Get Zone Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the status <strong>of</strong> a zone.<br />

3.4.2.2.7 Get Image Reception Diagnostics<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine if a camera is receiving valid video frames to<br />

process.<br />

3.4.2.2.8 Get Image<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to retrieve a snapshot from the sensor to verify proper<br />

operation and if camera movement has occurred.<br />

3.4.2.2.9 Get Zone List for Camera<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine which zones are associated with a camera.<br />

3.4.2.2.10 Get Zone Percent Inductance Change<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the change in inductance <strong>of</strong> a zone. This value<br />

shall be reported in percent change.<br />

3.4.2.2.11 Get Image Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the status <strong>of</strong> the last request to get an image<br />

from a camera.<br />

3.4.2.3 Monitor Output States<br />

Requirements for monitoring the output states <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.2.3.1 Get Output Group Output State<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the on or <strong>of</strong>f states for each output group.<br />

Output groups are used to compact the data to avoid overloading the communications link.<br />

3.4.3 Collection <strong>of</strong> Sample Data<br />

Requirements for the collection <strong>of</strong> sample data <strong>of</strong> the TSS follow.<br />

3.4.3.1 Retrieve Historical Sample Data from TSS<br />

Requirements for retrieving historical sample data from the TSS follow. To retrieve data from a particular<br />

historical sample data period, the zone number, the class, and a prior data entry number are specified.<br />

3.4.3.1.1 Get Historical Sample End Time<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the actual end time <strong>of</strong> the historical sample data<br />

period for each zone and class. If an RTC is not available, the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the last TSS<br />

reset is used as a timestamp.<br />

3.4.3.1.2 Get Historical Sample Volume<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the volume <strong>of</strong> traffic measured for the historical<br />

sample data period for each zone and class.<br />

3.4.3.1.3 Get Historical Sample Percent Occupancy<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the percent occupancy measured for historical<br />

sample data period for each zone and class.<br />

3.4.3.1.4 Get Historical Sample Speed<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the average speed <strong>of</strong> traffic measured for the<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 42<br />

historical sample data period for each zone and class.<br />

3.4.3.1.5 Get Historical Sample Zone Status<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the status <strong>of</strong> the zone during the historical<br />

sample data period for each zone and class.<br />

3.4.3.1.6 Get Historical Sequence Number<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the sequence number <strong>of</strong> the historical sample<br />

data period for each zone and class.<br />

3.4.3.1.7 Get Zone Class Label<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the identifying label assigned to a class <strong>of</strong> a<br />

zone.<br />

3.4.3.1.8 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sample Data Entries<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the number <strong>of</strong> sample periods that a zone is<br />

currently using.<br />

3.4.3.1.9 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zone Classes<br />

The TSS shall allow a management station to determine the number <strong>of</strong> classes that a zone is currently<br />

using.<br />

3.5 MULTI-VERSION INTEROPERABILITY (MVI-BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY)<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 has deprecated three tables that were used in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01. These tables<br />

have been replaced with new tables that provide additional features and functionality. The TSS shall<br />

allow Multi-Version Interoperability (MVI-backward compatibility) with <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01.<br />

3.5.1 Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample Table<br />

Requirements for MVI (backward compatibility) for this table follow.<br />

3.5.1.1 Get Sample End Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.1.2 Get Volume<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.1.3 Get Percent Occupancy<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.1.4 Get Speed<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.1.5 Get Zone Status<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 43<br />

3.5.2 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data Table<br />

Requirements for MVI for this table follow.<br />

3.5.2.1 Get Sample End Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.2.2 Get Volume<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.2.3 Get Percent Occupancy<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.2.4 Get Speed<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.2.5 Get Zone Status<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3 Loop Output Conditioning Table<br />

Requirements for MVI for this table follow.<br />

3.5.3.1 Get Output Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.2 Get Max Presence Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.3 Get Output Delay Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.4 Get Output Extend Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.5 Get Output Delay Enable<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.6 Get Output Extend Enable<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 44<br />

3.5.3.7 Set Output Mode<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.8 Set Max Presence Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.9 Set Output Delay Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.10 Set Output Extend Time<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.11 Set Output Delay Enable<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

3.5.3.12 Set Output Extend Enable<br />

The TSS shall allow support <strong>of</strong> this deprecated object, as indicated in the PRL, to permit MVI when<br />

necessary to support legacy implementations.<br />

Copy Per PRL Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 45<br />

Section 4<br />

DIALOGS [Normative]<br />

Section 4 is intended for product developers such as TSS manufacturers and system integrators. Others<br />

might find Section 4 and Section 5 helpful to gain a greater understanding <strong>of</strong> design details.<br />

Section 4 presents the standardized dialogs (i.e., sequence <strong>of</strong> data exchanges) that fulfill various<br />

requirements. As SNMP communications are largely driven by the management station, most <strong>of</strong> the<br />

requirements define how the TSS responds to various possible actions a management station might take.<br />

The <strong>NTCIP</strong> standards effort is based on SNMP. As a protocol, SNMP <strong>of</strong>fers a high degree <strong>of</strong> flexibility as<br />

to how the management station structures its request. For example, with SNMP, the management station<br />

can do any <strong>of</strong> the following:<br />

a) Send only those requests that are critical at the current time, whereas a standardized dialog typically<br />

sends requests relating to all associated data, regardless <strong>of</strong> whether it is critical for current purposes.<br />

b) Combine a number <strong>of</strong> requests in a single packet, whereas a standardized dialog dictates the exact<br />

contents <strong>of</strong> each packet.<br />

c) Separate a group <strong>of</strong> requests into multiple packets, whereas a standardized dialog dictates the exact<br />

contents <strong>of</strong> each packet.<br />

d) Interweave requests from multiple dialogs, whereas a standardized dialog dictates the exact ordering<br />

<strong>of</strong> messages, which are not interrupted with other messages.<br />

This flexibility can be a powerful tool, allowing a management station to optimize the use <strong>of</strong><br />

communications facilities. This is the primary reason that SNMP was chosen as the core <strong>NTCIP</strong> protocol;<br />

however, the flexibility also means that there are numerous allowable variations in the management<br />

process that a management station may choose to use.<br />

This flexibility also presents a challenge to ensuring interoperability. While a conformant TSS is required<br />

to support any allowed sequence in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, ensuring that a given TSS actually supports every<br />

possible combination would be impractical. Instead, most agencies only require that the TSS be tested to<br />

a standard set <strong>of</strong> procedures, which would use standardized dialogs. Without more extensive testing, a<br />

management station may attempt to use non-standard dialogs (e.g., to improve communications<br />

efficiency) against which a TSS has never been tested, which raises the potential for an interoperability<br />

issue to arise.<br />

To overcome this, Section 4 defines a lowest common denominator approach to communications<br />

between a management station and a TSS. Section 4 defines the standardized dialog for each Data<br />

Exchange Requirement defined in Section 3. Management stations may support other dialogs to fulfill<br />

these same requirements, as long as these dialogs are consistent with the rules defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong><br />

v02. Such a management station is termed a 'consistent management station'. A consistent management<br />

station interoperates with any 'conformant' TSS. However, since an agency cannot be certain that a TSS<br />

is conformant in every possible scenario (given practical constraints), interoperability issues could still<br />

arise.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 46<br />

A 'conformant management station' is required to <strong>of</strong>fer a mode in which it only uses the standardized<br />

dialogs as defined in Section 4. With this limited definition, there is relatively little variability in what<br />

constitutes a conformant management station, and fully testing a management station for conformance is<br />

a relatively straightforward process that can be done within the practical constraints faced by most<br />

agencies. A conformant management station provides an agency with a much greater chance <strong>of</strong><br />

achieving a base level <strong>of</strong> interoperability with <strong>of</strong>f-the-shelf TSSs that have been tested against <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

The rules for the standardized dialogs follow:<br />

a) The dialogs are defined by a sequence <strong>of</strong> GET or SET requests. These requests shall equate to the<br />

GET and SET operations defined in Sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.3 and shall be transmitted as a single<br />

message.<br />

b) The contents <strong>of</strong> each request are identified by an object name. Each object name consists <strong>of</strong> an<br />

object type and an instance identifier. Formal definitions <strong>of</strong> each object type are provided in Section 5<br />

and <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03. The meaning <strong>of</strong> the instance identifier is provided by these same definitions<br />

coupled with standard SNMP rules (see RFC 1212).<br />

c) Each message shall contain all <strong>of</strong> the objects as shown, unless otherwise indicated.<br />

d) A message shall not contain any other objects.<br />

e) The contents <strong>of</strong> each message sent by the management station may appear in any order.<br />

NOTE—Ideally, the order <strong>of</strong> objects should match the order as shown in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 to provide<br />

for the highest probability <strong>of</strong> interoperability. However, it is recognized that many implementations<br />

may use <strong>of</strong>f-the-shelf s<strong>of</strong>tware, which may prevent the designation <strong>of</strong> an exact ordering <strong>of</strong> objects<br />

and as a result, this ordering is not a requirement <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

f) After sending a message, the management station shall not transmit any other data across the<br />

communications channel until the earlier <strong>of</strong>:<br />

1) The management station receiving a response from the device; or<br />

2) The expiration <strong>of</strong> the response time.<br />

g) If the response indicates an error occurred in the operation, the management station shall exit the<br />

process, unless specific error-handling rules are specified by the dialog.<br />

h) Dialogs containing a sequence <strong>of</strong> only GET requests may request objects in any order.<br />

Finally, Section 4 provides a detailed definition <strong>of</strong> the required processes to implement the various data<br />

exchange requirements defined in Section 3. Section 4 is divided into four parts as follows:<br />

a) Tutorial—provides an overview to better understand the content <strong>of</strong> this section.<br />

b) SNMP Interface—defines the formal rules for the generic process by which all data is exchanged<br />

between the management station and the TSS.<br />

c) Dialogs—provides the standardized data exchange sequences that can be used by management<br />

stations to ensure interoperable implementation for the various data exchange requirements<br />

identified in Section 3.4.<br />

d) State Tables—provide:<br />

1) A graphical depiction <strong>of</strong> the relationship among the various pieces <strong>of</strong> data;<br />

2) The formal rules as to which data is supported by a TSS; and<br />

3) An indication <strong>of</strong> the operations that may be performed on each piece <strong>of</strong> data as well as any<br />

restrictions as to when these operations may be performed.<br />

NOTE—To fully and clearly describe the design <strong>of</strong> the system, an object-oriented approach is adopted;<br />

however, this object-oriented design in no way imposes a requirement for an object-oriented<br />

implementation. The diagrams shown in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 are solely intended to show the details <strong>of</strong> the<br />

interface logic and static structures; the implementation may follow an object-oriented or structured<br />

approach.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 47<br />

4.1 TUTORIAL [INFORMATIVE]<br />

The Requirements Traceability Matrix (RTM) presented in Annex A identifies the standardized dialog that<br />

can be used to achieve each <strong>of</strong> the data exchange requirements defined in Section 3.4. Simple data<br />

exchange requirements reference one <strong>of</strong> the generic SNMP dialogs along with a list <strong>of</strong> data elements.<br />

These equate to a single message being sent (e.g., a GET request) containing the referenced data<br />

elements followed by the appropriate response per the generic dialog specification.<br />

Section 4 defines the standardized dialogs for the more complicated data exchange requirements. Each<br />

<strong>of</strong> these dialogs is defined by a number <strong>of</strong> steps. Many <strong>of</strong> the steps reference data elements that are<br />

defined in Section 5. These data elements are also shown in the corresponding row <strong>of</strong> the RTM with their<br />

precise section number.<br />

The dialogs may also be accompanied by an informative figure that provides a graphical depiction <strong>of</strong> the<br />

normative text. The figures conform to the Uniform Modeling Language (UML) and depict the<br />

management station as an outside actor sending a series <strong>of</strong> messages to the TSS and the TSS returning<br />

responses. If there is any conflict between the figure and the text, the text takes precedence.<br />

Section 4.2 defines the generic processes used in subsequent discussions as to how data is exchanged.<br />

The diagrams used in this section are the same type as described below.<br />

Section 4.3 defines how the system is designed to work for a given data exchange requirement. Section<br />

4.3 indicates the sequence <strong>of</strong> actions that a management station is required to follow to provide the<br />

specific service, and this is typically shown through a sequence diagram. A solid line with an arrowhead<br />

indicates initiation <strong>of</strong> a request from one entity to another (e.g., typically the management station to the<br />

TSS). A dashed-line with an arrowhead indicates a return value to a request (i.e., the TSS to the<br />

management station). Generally, the entities that initiate requests are on the left <strong>of</strong> those receiving the<br />

request. The flow <strong>of</strong> events can be followed by looking at the message lines between objects as they<br />

move across and down the page. An example sequence diagram is provided in Figure 2.<br />

:Managemen<br />

t Station<br />

:TSS<br />

(Precondition) The management station<br />

shall determine the number <strong>of</strong> outputs and<br />

the number <strong>of</strong> sensor zones supported by<br />

the TSS.<br />

outputConfig.a is a structure containing<br />

the following data:<br />

a) Sensor zone number<br />

b) Failsafe mode<br />

c) Mode status<br />

d) Label<br />

Where a = output to configure.<br />

Set()<br />

outputConfig.a<br />

Figure 2 Sample Sequence Diagram for Output Configuration<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 48<br />

In addition to sequence diagrams for a given dialog, there may also be a View <strong>of</strong> Participating Classes<br />

(VOPC) diagram that depicts the interrelationships among the various entities identified in the sequence<br />

diagrams. For a vast majority <strong>of</strong> cases, the dialogs for a TSS are simplistic enough to be described in<br />

simple list form without sequence or class diagrams.<br />

4.2 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL (SNMP) INTERFACE<br />

To promote interoperability, <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 requires support for the Simple Network Management<br />

Protocol (SNMP). Section 4.2 defines how the management station and TSS shall respond to each<br />

request using SNMP.<br />

The TSS shall conform to the requirements for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as<br />

defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103. Sections 4.2.1 through 4.2.4 provide a description <strong>of</strong> the key services <strong>of</strong>fered by<br />

SNMP assuming no errors; precise rules and procedures are defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103. Section 4.2.5<br />

extends the requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103 by providing additional requirements that supplement but do not<br />

replace any requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103.<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

SNMP defines a generic process by which a management station can retrieve data from a TSS. This<br />

process consists <strong>of</strong> a Get request (GET) and a GetResponse as depicted in Figure 3. Both the Get<br />

request and the GetResponse messages contain a list <strong>of</strong> objects as defined by the varBindingList<br />

structure (see Section 4.2.4).<br />

:<br />

Statio<br />

Get(varBindingList<br />

GetResponse(varBindingList<br />

: TSS<br />

Figure 3 SNMP Get Interface<br />

This generic process is customized by subsequent sections <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02, by referencing the 'GET'<br />

operation, and directly by the RTM, by section number, to fulfill a wide range <strong>of</strong> the requirements defined<br />

in Section 3.<br />

4.2.2 Generic SNMP Get-Next Interface<br />

SNMP defines a process by which a management station can explore data within a TSS. This process<br />

consists <strong>of</strong> a GetNext request and a GetResponse as depicted in Figure 4. Both the GetNext request and<br />

the GetResponse messages contain a list <strong>of</strong> objects as defined by the varBindingList structure (see<br />

Section 4.2.4).<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 49<br />

:<br />

Statio<br />

GetNext(varBindingList<br />

GetResponse(varBindingList<br />

: TSS<br />

Figure 4 SNMP GetNext Interface<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

SNMP defines a generic process by which a management station can send data to a TSS. This process<br />

consists <strong>of</strong> a Set request and a GetResponse as depicted in Figure 5. Both the Set request and the<br />

GetResponse messages contain a list <strong>of</strong> objects as defined by the varBindingList structure (see Section<br />

4.2.4).<br />

:<br />

Statio<br />

Set(varBindingList<br />

GetResponse(varBindingList<br />

: TSS<br />

Figure 5 SNMP Set Interface<br />

NOTE—The response message issued to an SNMP Set request is the same message structure as used<br />

to respond to an SNMP Get request. The SNMP standard calls this response message a GetResponse,<br />

but it is in fact a response to either a GET or a SET.<br />

This generic process is customized by subsequent sections <strong>of</strong> this standard, by referencing the 'SET'<br />

operation, and directly by the RTM, by section number, to fulfill a wide range <strong>of</strong> the requirements defined<br />

in Section 3.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 50<br />

4.2.4 Variable Binding List Structure<br />

The requests and responses for the Get, Get Next, and Set operations all use the varBindingList<br />

structure. <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103 v02 defines this structure as containing zero or more varBindings, where each<br />

varBinding is defined to consist <strong>of</strong> an object name (as indicated by an Object Identifier (OID)) and the<br />

associated object value. This is relationship is depicted in Figure 6.<br />

Figure 6 SNMP Interface—View <strong>of</strong> Participating Classes<br />

4.2.5 Additional Requirements<br />

4.2.5.1 Grouping <strong>of</strong> Objects in a Request<br />

The TSS shall allow the management station to perform a single Get, GetNext, or Set operation on any<br />

combination <strong>of</strong> supported objects with the objects listed in any order within the message, unless<br />

otherwise restricted by <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

The TSS shall not associate any semantics to the ordering <strong>of</strong> objects within the varBindingsList. As<br />

required by RFC 1157, Clause 4.1.5, each object shall be affected "as if simultaneously set with respect<br />

to all other assignments specified in the same message."<br />

4.2.5.2 Support <strong>of</strong> Get<br />

The TSS shall allow the management station to perform the Get operation on any supported object for<br />

which support for the Get Operation is indicated in Section 4.2.1.<br />

4.2.5.3 Support <strong>of</strong> GetNext<br />

The TSS shall allow the management station to perform the GetNext operation on any OBJECT<br />

IDENTIFIER.<br />

4.2.5.4 Support <strong>of</strong> Set<br />

The TSS shall allow the management station to perform the Set operation on any supported object for<br />

which support for the Set Operation is indicated in Section 4.2.3.<br />

4.2.5.5 Performance<br />

The TSS shall process the Get, GetNext, or Set request in accordance with all <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1103<br />

v02, including updating the value in the database and initiating the transmission <strong>of</strong> the appropriate<br />

response (assuming that the TSS has permission to transmit) within 1 second <strong>of</strong> receiving the last byte <strong>of</strong><br />

the request.<br />

4.3 SPECIFIED DIALOGS<br />

Section 4.3 provides the standardized data exchange sequences that can be used by management<br />

stations to ensure interoperable implementations for the various data exchange requirements identified in<br />

Section 3.4.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 51<br />

4.3.1 Managing the TSS Configuration<br />

<strong>Standard</strong>ized dialogs for managing the TSS configuration are defined in the following subsections.<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to restart, reinitialize, restore, retune, re-sync, run<br />

short diagnostics or long diagnostics <strong>of</strong> a TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) None<br />

b) The management station shall GET the sensorSystemStatus.x state. If the state <strong>of</strong><br />

sensorSystemStatus is 'initializing', 'pendingConfigurationChange', or<br />

'validatingPendingConfiguration', then the management station shall abort the process<br />

c) The management station shall SET the sensorSystemReset.y state to 'restart',<br />

'reinitializeUserSettings', 'restoreFactoryDefaults', 'retune', 'resyncSamplingPeriods',<br />

'shortDiagnostics', or 'fullDiagnostics'<br />

d) The management station shall GET the sensorSystemStatus.x state<br />

e) If the management station gets no response, then repeat Step d up to maximum TSS initialization<br />

time<br />

f) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'initializing', then repeat Step d<br />

g) If sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'oK', then the TSS reset is complete<br />

h) If sensorSystemStatus.x state NOT 'oK', then the reset may not have completed, did not complete<br />

normally, or an error was encountered during the process. The management station shall abort the<br />

process<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorSystemStatus<br />

y = sensorSystemReset<br />

4.3.1.2 Send a Configuration File<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to send and execute a configuration change shall be<br />

as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) None<br />

b) The management station may FTP a Configuration File to the TSS<br />

c) The management station may set pendingConfigurationFileName to the desired configuration file to<br />

execute<br />

d) Complete normally the Validate Pending Configuration process<br />

e) Complete normally the Execute Pending Configuration Change process<br />

4.3.1.3 Execute Pending Configuration Change<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to execute a pending configuration change shall be as<br />

follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station has completed normally the Validate Pending Configuration<br />

process<br />

b) The management station shall GET the sensorSystemStatus.x state. If the state <strong>of</strong><br />

sensorSystemStatus is NOT 'pendingConfigurationChange', then the management station shall abort<br />

the process<br />

c) The management station shall SET sensorSystemReset.y state to 'executePendingConfiguration'<br />

d) The management station shall GET the sensorSytemStatus.x state<br />

e) If the management station gets no response, then repeat Step d up to maximum TSS initialization<br />

time<br />

f) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'initializing', then repeat Step d<br />

g) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'oK', then the new configuration is complete<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 52<br />

h) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is NOT 'oK', then the Execute Pending Configuration Change may<br />

not have completed, did not complete normally, or an error was encountered during the process. The<br />

management station shall abort the process<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorSystemStatus<br />

y = sensorSystemReset<br />

4.3.1.4 Abort Pending Configuration<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to abort a pending configuration change shall be as<br />

follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station has completed normally the Validate Pending Configuration<br />

process<br />

b) The management station shall GET the sensorSystemStatus.x state. If the state <strong>of</strong><br />

sensorSystemStatus is NOT 'pendingConfigurationChange', then the management station shall abort<br />

the process<br />

c) The management station shall SET the sensorSystemReset.y state to 'abortPendingConfiguration.<br />

The abort pending configuration is then complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorSystemStatus<br />

y = sensorSystemReset<br />

4.3.1.5 Validate a Pending Configuration<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to validate a configuration file (i.e., ensure that the file<br />

is a valid configuration file) shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station should have transferred the new configuration file prior to<br />

requesting it be validated. This is to ensure that the management station knows what configuration<br />

file is being validated by the TSS<br />

b) The management station shall GET the sensorSystemStatus.x state. If the state <strong>of</strong><br />

sensorSystemStatus is 'diagnosticError', then the management station shall abort the process<br />

c) The management station shall SET sensorSystemReset.y state to 'validatePendingConfiguration'<br />

d) The management station shall GET the sensorSytemStatus.x state<br />

e) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'validatingPendingConfiguration', then repeat Step d<br />

f) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'pendingConfigurationChange', then the new configuration is<br />

valid and ready to execute<br />

g) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is 'pendingConfigurationError', then the new configuration is not<br />

valid and cannot be executed<br />

h) If the sensorSystemStatus.x state is NOT 'pendingConfigurationChange' or<br />

'pendingConfigurationError', then the Validate Pending Configuration may not have completed, did<br />

not complete normally, or an error was encountered during the process. The management station<br />

shall abort the process<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorSystemStatus<br />

y = sensorSystemReset<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to configure a sensor zone shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. For a management station to set a label, the optional sensorZoneLabel is<br />

supported and label length is less than or equal to maximumNumberOfCharacters. For the<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 53<br />

management station to set sensorZoneSamplePeriod, the TSS supports sampling features. For the<br />

management station to set sensorZonePairedZone, sensorZonePairedZoneOptions,<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing, sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor, sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength,<br />

or sensorZoneLength, the TSS supports speed features<br />

b) The management station shall SET the following data to the desired values:<br />

1) sensorZoneOptions.x<br />

2) sensorZoneOptionsStatus.x<br />

3) sensorZoneSamplePeriod.x<br />

4) sensorZoneLabel.x<br />

5) sensorZoneAndOperator.x<br />

6) sensorZoneOrOperator.x<br />

7) sensorZonePairedZone.x<br />

8) sensorZonePairedZoneOptions.x<br />

9) sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing.x<br />

10) sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor.x<br />

11) sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength.x<br />

12) sensorZoneLength.x<br />

13) sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime.x<br />

14) sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime.x<br />

15) sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime.x<br />

16) sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sensor zone to be modified<br />

d) If no additional sensorZoneEntry parameters to set, then configuring sensorZoneEntry is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve a configuration for a sensor zone shall be<br />

as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. For a management station to get a label, the optional sensorZoneLabel is<br />

supported. For the management station to get sensorZoneSamplePeriod, the TSS supports sampling<br />

features. For the management station to get sensorZonePairedZone,<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneOptions, sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing,<br />

sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor, sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength, or sensorZoneLength, the TSS<br />

supports speed features<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) sensorZoneNumber.x<br />

2) sensorZoneOptions.x<br />

3) sensorZoneOptionsStatus.x<br />

4) sensorZoneSamplePeriod.x<br />

5) sensorZoneLabel.x<br />

6) sensorZoneAndOperator.x<br />

7) sensorZoneOrOperator.x<br />

8) sensorZonePairedZone.x<br />

9) sensorZonePairedZoneOptions.x<br />

10) sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing.x<br />

11) sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor.x<br />

12) sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength.x<br />

13) sensorZoneLength.x<br />

14) sensorZoneStatus.x<br />

15) sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime.x<br />

16) sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime.x<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 54<br />

17) sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime.x<br />

18) sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sensor zone that it is desired to retrieve data from<br />

d) If no additional sensorZoneEntry parameters to get, then retrieving sensorZoneEntry configuration is<br />

complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.1.8 Configuring External Arming Inputs<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to configure the external arming inputs <strong>of</strong> a TSS shall<br />

be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The TSS to be configured shall support timing features. The TSS also supports the<br />

optional external arming inputs.<br />

b) The management station shall SET externalArmingInputs.<br />

c) Configuring <strong>of</strong> external arming inputs is complete.<br />

NOTE—Only bits with a value <strong>of</strong> one (1) have any effect. This allows multiple management stations to<br />

control specific arming inputs. Bits to be controlled by each management station are required to be set to<br />

OFF or set to ON. Therefore, for any input there are four possible settings: (OFF:0 ON:0 = No Change,<br />

OFF:1 ON:0 = Set to Off, OFF:0 ON:1 = Set to On, and OFF:1 ON:1 = Not Valid—in this case, the set to<br />

Off shall take precedence).<br />

4.3.1.9 Retrieve External Arming Inputs<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the configuration <strong>of</strong> the external arming<br />

inputs <strong>of</strong> a TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The TSS to be configured shall support timing features. The TSS also supports the<br />

optional external arming inputs.<br />

b) The management station shall GET externalArmingInputs.<br />

c) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> external arming inputs is complete.<br />

NOTE—Arming inputs that are set to OFF have their OFF bits set to one (1). Arming inputs that are set to<br />

ON have their ON bits set to one (1).<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to configure the sensor zone output conditioning <strong>of</strong> a<br />

TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. For the management station to set sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime,<br />

sensorZoneOutputDelayTime, or sensorZoneOutputExtendTime, the TSS supports timing features.<br />

For the management station to set sensorZoneOutputDelayMode, sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables,<br />

sensorZoneOutputExtendMode, or sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables, the TSS supports the optional<br />

External Arming Inputs or the optional Arming Pins. For the management station to set<br />

sensorZoneOutputSequenced, the TSS supports this optional feature<br />

b) The management station shall SET the following data to the desired values:<br />

1) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputMode.x<br />

2) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime.x<br />

3) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputDelayTime.x<br />

4) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputDelayMode.x<br />

5) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables.x<br />

6) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputExtendTime.x<br />

7) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputExtendMode.x<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 55<br />

8) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables.x<br />

9) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputSequenced.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sensor zone to be modified<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the sensor zone output conditioning <strong>of</strong> a<br />

TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. For the management station to get sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime,<br />

sensorZoneOutputDelayTime, or sensorZoneOutputExtendTime, the TSS supports timing features.<br />

For the management station to get sensorZoneOutputDelayMode, sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables,<br />

sensorZoneOutputExtendMode, or sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables, the TSS supports the optional<br />

External Arming Inputs or the optional Arming Pins. For the management station to get<br />

sensorZoneOutputSequenced, the TSS supports this optional feature<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired settings:<br />

1) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneNumber.x<br />

2) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputMode.x<br />

3) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime.x<br />

4) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputDelayTime.x<br />

5) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputDelayMode.x<br />

6) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables.x<br />

7) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputExtendTime.x<br />

8) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputExtendMode.x<br />

9) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables.x<br />

10) outputConditioningEntry:sensorZoneOutputSequenced.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sensor zone to be retrieved<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

This dialog accesses objects that are now deprecated and is included to provide MVI. See Section<br />

4.3.1.10 for the preferred dialog and objects.<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to configure the loop output conditioning for a sensor<br />

zone shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputMode.x<br />

2) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneMaxPresenceTime.x<br />

3) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputDelayTime.x<br />

4) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputExtendTime.x<br />

5) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputExtendEnable.x<br />

6) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputDelayEnable.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

d) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> the loop output conditioning for a sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 56<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

This dialog accesses objects that are now deprecated and is included to provide MVI. See Section<br />

4.3.1.10 for the preferred dialog and objects.<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the loop output conditioning for a sensor<br />

zone shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputMode.x<br />

2) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneMaxPresenceTime.x<br />

3) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputDelayTime.x<br />

4) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputExtendTime.x<br />

5) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputExtendEnable.x<br />

6) LoopOutputConditioningEntry:zoneOutputDelayEnable.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

d) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> the loop output conditioning for a sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.2 Monitoring the Status <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

<strong>Standard</strong>ized dialogs for monitoring the TSS configuration that are more complex than simple GETs or<br />

SETs are defined as follows.<br />

4.3.2.1 Configure Output<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to configure the output configuration <strong>of</strong> a TSS shall be<br />

as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the outputNumber is less than or equal<br />

to maxOutputNumber. For a management station to set outputLabel, the TSS supports the optional<br />

outputLabel, and label length is less than or equal to maximumNumberOfCharacters. For the<br />

management station to set outputArmingEnables or outputArmingMode, the TSS supports the<br />

optional External Arming Inputs or the optional Arming Pins<br />

b) The management station shall SET the following data to the desired values:<br />

1) outputConfigurationEntry:outputSensorZoneNumber.x<br />

2) outputConfigurationEntry:outputFailsafeMode.x<br />

3) outputConfigurationEntry:outputModeStatus.x<br />

4) outputConfigurationEntry:outputLabel.x<br />

5) outputConfigurationEntry:outputArmingEnables.x<br />

6) outputConfigurationEntry:outputArmingMode.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each output number to be modified<br />

Where:<br />

x = outputNumber<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Output Configuration<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the output configuration <strong>of</strong> a TSS shall be<br />

as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the outputNumber is less than or equal<br />

to maxOutputNumber. For a management station to get outputLabel, the TSS supports the optional<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 57<br />

outputLabel. For the management station to get outputArmingEnables or outputArmingMode, the<br />

TSS supports the optional External Arming Inputs or the optional Arming Pins<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) outputConfigurationEntry:outputSensorZoneNumber.x<br />

2) outputConfigurationEntry:outputFailsafeMode.x<br />

3) outputConfigurationEntry:outputModeStatus.x<br />

4) outputConfigurationEntry:outputLabel.x<br />

5) outputConfigurationEntry:outputArmingEnables.x<br />

6) outputConfigurationEntry:outputArmingMode.x<br />

c) Repeat Step 2 for each output number to be retrieved<br />

Where:<br />

x = outputNumber<br />

4.3.2.3 Retrieve Output Group<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve an output group <strong>of</strong> a TSS shall be as<br />

follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the outputGroupNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxOutputGroups<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) outputConfigurationEntry:outputGroupNumber.x<br />

2) outputConfigurationEntry:outputGroupState.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each output group number to be retrieved<br />

Where:<br />

x = outputGroupNumber<br />

4.3.3 Retrieving Sample Data from TSS<br />

<strong>Standard</strong>ized dialogs for retrieving sample data from the TSS that are more complex than simple GETs or<br />

SETs are defined in the following subsections.<br />

4.3.3.1 Retrieve Sensor Zone Sequence Parameters<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the sensor zone sequence parameters for a<br />

TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) zoneSequenceEntry:numSampleDataEntries.x<br />

2) zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sensor zone number to be retrieved<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the sample data for a particular sensor<br />

zone, sample entry, and zone class for a TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The management station shall determine that the sampleEntryNum is<br />

less than or equal to numSampleDataEntries. The management station shall determine that the<br />

sampleZoneClass is less than or equal to numSensorZoneClass. The TSS supports sampling<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 58<br />

features<br />

b) The management station shall GET and remember the value <strong>of</strong><br />

sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

c) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) sampleDataEntry:sampleEndTime.z.y.x<br />

2) sampleDataEntry:sampleVolumeData.z.y.x<br />

3) sampleDataEntry:samplePercentOccupancy.z.y.x<br />

4) sampleDataEntry:sampleSpeedData.z.y.x<br />

5) sampleDataEntry:sampleZoneStatus.z.y.x<br />

6) sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

d) Repeat Step c for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

e) The management station shall GET and remember the value <strong>of</strong><br />

sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

f) If the value from Step b is not the same as the value in Step e, then all data is not from the intended<br />

sample period (the buffer scrolled sometime during the read cycle). Discard the data that was read. If<br />

sampleEntryNum is less than or equal to zoneSequenceEntry:numSampleDataEntries, then<br />

sampleEntryNum = sampleEntryNum + 1 and go to Step b (this rereads the data from its new<br />

location) else abort (the data for that sample period is lost)<br />

g) Get is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

y = sampleEntryNum<br />

z = sampleZoneClass<br />

4.3.3.3 Retrieve All Sample Data for a Sensor Zone<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the sensor zone sample data for a TSS<br />

shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET zoneSequenceEntry:numSampleDataEntries.x and<br />

zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x<br />

c) sampleEntryNum = zoneSequenceEntry:numSampleDataEntries.x from Step b<br />

d) sampleZoneClass = zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x from Step b<br />

e) The management station shall GET and remember the value <strong>of</strong><br />

sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

f) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) sampleDataEntry:sampleEndTime.z.y.x<br />

2) sampleDataEntry:sampleVolumeData.z.y.x<br />

3) sampleDataEntry:samplePercentOccupancy.z.y.x<br />

4) sampleDataEntry:sampleSpeedData.z.y.x<br />

5) sampleDataEntry:sampleZoneStatus.z.y.x<br />

6) sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

g) Repeat Step f for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

h) If sampleZoneClass is greater than 0, then sampleZoneClass = sampleZoneClass - 1 and go to<br />

Step f<br />

i) The management station shall GET and remember the value <strong>of</strong><br />

sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

j) If the value from Step e is not the same as the value in Step i, then all data is not from the same<br />

sample period (the buffer scrolled sometime during the read cycle). Discard the data that was read<br />

for the current sampleEntryNum. If sampleEntryNum is less than or equal to<br />

zoneSequenceEntry:numSampleDataEntries, then sampleEntryNum = sampleEntryNum + 1,<br />

sampleZoneClass = zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x from Step b, and go to Step d (this<br />

rereads the data from its new location) else discard all data read for this sampleEntryNum for this<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 59<br />

sampleZoneNumber and go to Step c (the data for that sample period for that sample zone number is<br />

lost)<br />

k) If sampleDataEntryNum is greater than 1 then sampleDataEntryNum = sampleDataEntryNum - 1 and<br />

go to Step d<br />

l) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> all sample data for a sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

y = sampleEntryNum<br />

z = sampleZoneClass<br />

NOTE—Reading <strong>of</strong> sample data starts from the oldest entry to the newest to try and read the oldest data<br />

before it is scrolled out <strong>of</strong> the buffer.<br />

4.3.3.4 Retrieve In-Progress Sample Data for a Sensor Zone [INFORMATIVE]<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the sensor zone sample data for the<br />

sample currently in-progress for a TSS shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x<br />

c) sampleEntryNum = 0<br />

d) sampleZoneClass = zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x from Step b<br />

e) The management station shall GET and remember the value <strong>of</strong><br />

sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

f) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) sampleDataEntry:sampleEndTime.z.y.x<br />

2) sampleDataEntry:sampleVolumeData.z.y.x<br />

3) sampleDataEntry:samplePercentOccupancy.z.y.x<br />

4) sampleDataEntry:sampleSpeedData.z.y.x<br />

5) sampleDataEntry:sampleZoneStatus.z.y.x<br />

6) sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

g) Repeat Step f for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

h) If sampleZoneClass is greater than 0 then sampleZoneClass = sampleZoneClass - 1 and go to Step f<br />

i) The management station shall GET and save the value <strong>of</strong><br />

sampleDataEntry:sampleSequenceNumber.z.y.x<br />

j) If the value from Step e is not the same as the value in Step i, then all data is not from the same<br />

sample period (the buffer scrolled sometime during the read cycle). Discard the data that was read<br />

for the current sampleEntryNum. If the sample period that just completed is the data <strong>of</strong> interest, set<br />

sampleEntryNum = 1 and go to Step d. The in-progress sample period contains very little data if the<br />

buffer just scrolled. If this data is desired go to Step c else exit<br />

k) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> the in-progress sample data for the sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

y = sampleEntryNum<br />

z = sampleZoneClass<br />

4.3.3.5 Retrieve Sensor Zone Class Labels<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the class labels for a sensor zone shall be<br />

as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to the maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 60<br />

c) sampleZoneClass = zoneSequenceEntry:numSensorZoneClass.x from Step b<br />

d) The management station shall GET zoneClassLabel.y.x<br />

e) If zoneClassEntry is greater than 0, then zoneClassEntry = zoneClassEntry - 1 and go to Step d<br />

f) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> class labels for this sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = zoneClassEntry<br />

y = sampleZoneClass<br />

4.3.3.6 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Most Recent Data Sample for a<br />

Sensor Zone<br />

This dialog accesses objects that are now deprecated and is included to provide MVI. See Section<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class for the<br />

preferred dialog and objects.<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the most recent data sample for a sensor<br />

zone shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) DataCollectionEntry:endTime.x<br />

2) DataCollectionEntry:volumeData.x<br />

3) DataCollectionEntry:percentOccupancy.x<br />

4) DataCollectionEntry:speedData.x<br />

5) DataCollectionEntry:zoneStatus.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

d) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> the most recent data sample for the sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.3.7 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data for a Sensor<br />

Zone<br />

This dialog accesses objects that are now deprecated and is included to provide MVI. See Section<br />

4.3.3.2 for the preferred dialog and objects.<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the historical sample data for a sensor zone<br />

shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall be aware that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The TSS supports sampling features<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following desired data:<br />

1) DataBufferEntry:endTimeBuffer.x<br />

2) DataBufferEntry:volumeDataBuffer.x<br />

3) DataBufferEntry:percentOccupancyBuffer.x<br />

4) DataBufferEntry:speedDataBuffer.x<br />

5) DataBufferEntry:zoneStatusBuffer.x<br />

c) Repeat Step b for each sample data item to be retrieved<br />

d) Retrieval <strong>of</strong> the data buffer for the sensor zone is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 61<br />

4.3.4 Managing the Inductive Loop Features <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

<strong>Standard</strong>ized dialogs for managing the Inductive Loop features <strong>of</strong> the TSS that are more complex than<br />

simple GETs or SETs are defined in the following subsections.<br />

4.3.4.1 Configure Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to configure the loop senor setup parameters for<br />

sensor zones shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The sensorTechnology is inductiveLoop<br />

b) The management station shall SET the following objects to the desired values for each<br />

sensorZoneNumber:<br />

1) zoneSensitivity.x<br />

2) zoneSensitivityMode.x<br />

3) zoneFrequencyRange.x<br />

4) sensorZoneLoopLayout.x<br />

c) If additional loop sensor setup data needs to be entered for additional sensorZoneNumbers repeat<br />

Step b<br />

d) If no additional data is to be entered for additional sensorZoneNumber's then SET is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.4.2 Retrieve Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the loop sensor setup parameters for<br />

sensor zones shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The sensorTechnology is inductiveLoop<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following objects values for each sensorZoneNumber:<br />

1) zoneSensitivity.x<br />

2) zoneSensitivityMode.x<br />

3) zoneFrequencyRange.x<br />

4) sensorZoneLoopLayout.x<br />

c) If additional loop sensor setup data needs to be retrieved for additional sensorZoneNumbers, repeat<br />

Step b<br />

d) If no additional data is to be entered for additional sensorZoneNumbers, then GET is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.4.3 Retrieve Loop System Status<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to retrieve the loop system status parameters for a<br />

loop sensor shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The management station shall determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or<br />

equal to maxSensorZones. The sensorTechnology value is also set to inductiveLoop<br />

b) The management station shall GET the following objects values for each sensorZoneNumber:<br />

1) zoneInductance.x<br />

2) zoneFrequency.x<br />

3) zoneInductanceChange.x<br />

4) zonePercentInductanceChange.x<br />

5) zoneFaultHistory.x<br />

6) zoneFaultCount.x<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 62<br />

7) sensorZoneNumber.x<br />

c) If additional loop system status data needs to be retrieved for additional sensorZoneNumbers, repeat<br />

Step b<br />

d) If no additional data is to be retrieved for additional sensorZoneNumbers, then GET is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.5 Managing the Machine Vision Features <strong>of</strong> the TSS<br />

<strong>Standard</strong>ized dialogs for managing the Machine Vision features <strong>of</strong> the TSS that are more complex than<br />

simple GETs or SETs are defined in the following subsections.<br />

4.3.5.1 Set the Build Image Parameter<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to set the Build Image parameter for a machine vision<br />

TSS sensor shall be as follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The sensorTechnology type shall be machineVision. The management station shall<br />

determine that the sensorZoneNumber is less than or equal to maxSensorZones. SensorZone as<br />

used in this dialog is from one camera only. The desired format <strong>of</strong> the image is a supported format,<br />

either jpeg or bitmap. If the management station sets imageType equal to ‘snapshot’, then<br />

snapshotImage is be supported by the camera. If the management station sets imageType equal to<br />

‘baseline’, then baselineImage is supported and available. For the management station to set the<br />

imageOverlayType, the imageOverlayType is be supported<br />

b) The management station shall SET the desired value for the following objects:<br />

1) imageZoneNumber.x<br />

2) imageType.x<br />

3) imageOverlayType.x<br />

4) imageFormat.x<br />

5) imageQuality.x<br />

c) The management station shall SET the value <strong>of</strong> buildImageCmd to 'buildImage'<br />

d) The management station shall GET the value <strong>of</strong> buildImageStatus.x<br />

1) If the value <strong>of</strong> buildImageStatus.x is 'buildingImage' or 'buildPending' then to abort<br />

buildImageCmd the management station shall SET the value <strong>of</strong> buildImageCmd to<br />

'cancelBuildInProgress'. The management station shall then repeat Step c<br />

2) If buildImageStatus.x is NOT 'imageReady', then an error has occurred and the value returned<br />

indicates the type <strong>of</strong> error encountered<br />

3) If buildImageStatus.x is 'imageReady', then the management station can retrieve the image via<br />

FTP<br />

4) If the management station needs to build other images, then go to Step b else Build Image is<br />

complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

4.3.5.2 Set Cancel Build In-Progress<br />

The standardized dialog for a management station to cancel a build in-progress for a camera shall be as<br />

follows:<br />

a) (Precondition) The value <strong>of</strong> sensorTechnology shall be machineVision. The management station<br />

shall determine that buildImageStatus.x is equal to either 'buildingImage' or 'buildPending'<br />

b) The management station shall SET the value <strong>of</strong> buildImageCmd.x to 'cancelBuildInProgress'<br />

c) Cancel Build in-Progress is complete<br />

Where:<br />

x = sensorZoneNumber<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 63<br />

4.4 STATE TABLES<br />

4.4.1 State Transitions for sensorSystemStatus<br />

The TSS powers up in the ‘initializing‘ state.<br />

Current State Command or Event Result<br />

1—other<br />

2—oK<br />

3—initializing<br />

TSS begins operating normally<br />

Received one <strong>of</strong> the following commands:<br />

sensorSystemReset:restart<br />

sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

sensorSystemReset.retune<br />

sensorSystemReset.resyncSamplingPeriods<br />

sensorSystemReset.shortDiagnostics<br />

sensorSystemReset.fullDiagnostics<br />

Received<br />

sensorSystemReset:validatePendingConfiguration<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

While operating, an error is detected by the TSS in<br />

the active configuration<br />

The TSS is not operating normally and cannot<br />

transition to any <strong>of</strong> the other defined states<br />

Received one <strong>of</strong> the following commands:<br />

sensorSystemReset:restart<br />

sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

sensorSystemReset.retune<br />

sensorSystemReset.resyncSamplingPeriods<br />

sensorSystemReset.shortDiagnostics<br />

sensorSystemReset.fullDiagnostics<br />

sensorSystemReset.executePendingConfiguration<br />

Received<br />

sensorSystemReset:validatePendingConfiguration<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

While operating, an error is detected by the TSS in<br />

the active configuration<br />

The TSS is not operating normally and cannot<br />

transition to any <strong>of</strong> the other defined states<br />

Initializing has completed successfully<br />

2—oK<br />

3—initializing<br />

5—<br />

validatingPendingConfig<br />

uration<br />

6—diagError<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

1—other<br />

3—Initializing<br />

5—<br />

validatingPendingConfig<br />

uration<br />

6—diagError<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

1—other<br />

2—oK<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 64<br />

Current State Command or Event Result<br />

4—<br />

pendingConfiguration<br />

Change<br />

5—<br />

validatingPendingCo<br />

nfiguration<br />

6—diagError<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

While initializing, an error is detected by the TSS in<br />

the active configuration<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration and<br />

the TSS is operating normally.<br />

The TSS did not receive a<br />

sensorSystemReset:executePendingConfiguration<br />

command before the manufacturer specified time to<br />

complete the configuration expired<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset:executePendingConfiguration.<br />

If any other sensorSystemReset commands should<br />

be run, either an abort or execute is required to be<br />

completed first<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset.abortPendingConfiguration and<br />

a fault is detected in the active configuration file<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration and<br />

the TSS is operating normally<br />

The TSS has validated the pending configuration<br />

file and found no errors in it. It is now ready to<br />

execute<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration and<br />

the current configuration file has a fault detected<br />

The TSS has validated the pending configuration file<br />

and found it to contain errors. The file cannot be<br />

executed<br />

The manufacturer may specify whether the TSS<br />

may return to normal operation if the error clears.<br />

This depends on the type <strong>of</strong> error<br />

6—diagError<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

2—oK<br />

3—initializing<br />

6—diagError<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

2—oK<br />

5—<br />

pendingConfigurationCh<br />

ange<br />

6—diagError<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

8—pendingConfigError<br />

2—oK<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 65<br />

Current State Command or Event Result<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

8—<br />

pendingConfigError<br />

Received one <strong>of</strong> the following commands to try and<br />

clear the error:<br />

sensorSystemReset:restart<br />

sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

sensorSystemReset.retune<br />

sensorSystemReset.resyncSamplingPeriods<br />

sensorSystemReset.shortDiagnostics<br />

sensorSystemReset.fullDiagnostics<br />

The TSS is not operating normally and cannot<br />

transition to any <strong>of</strong> the other defined states<br />

The active configuration error was corrected at the<br />

TSS using the local user interface<br />

Received one <strong>of</strong> the following commands to try and<br />

clear the error:<br />

sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

Received<br />

sensorSystemReset:validatePendingConfiguration<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration and<br />

the TSS is operating normally<br />

Hardware fault detected in the TSS<br />

The TSS received a<br />

sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration and<br />

the current configuration file has a fault detected<br />

3—initializing<br />

1—other<br />

2—oK<br />

3—initializing<br />

5—<br />

validatingPendingConfig<br />

uration<br />

6—diagError<br />

2—oK<br />

6—diagError<br />

7—activeConfigError<br />

4.4.1.1 Other State<br />

When in the other state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset:restart<br />

2) sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

3) sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

4) sensorSystemReset:retune<br />

5) sensorSystemReset:resyncSamplingPeriods<br />

6) sensorSystemReset:shortDiagnostics<br />

7) sensorSystemReset:fullDiagnostics<br />

8) sensorSystemReset:validatePendingConfiguration<br />

b) The TSS shall not enter this state if the state can also transition to one <strong>of</strong> the following:<br />

1) pendingConfigurationChange<br />

2) validatingPendingConfiguration<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 66<br />

3) diagError<br />

4) activeConfigError<br />

5) pendingConfigError<br />

4.4.1.2 OK State<br />

When in the OK state, the following rule shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset:restart<br />

2) sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

3) sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

4) sensorSystemReset:retune<br />

5) sensorSystemReset:resyncSamplingPeriods<br />

6) sensorSystemReset:shortDiagnostics<br />

7) sensorSystemReset:fullDiagnostics<br />

8) sensorSystemReset:validatePendingConfiguration<br />

4.4.1.3 Initializing State<br />

When in the initializing state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall reject all sensorSystemReset commands<br />

b) Once initializing is complete, the sensorSystemStatus shall transition to ‘oK’ if successful<br />

c) If initialization is not successful, the state may be set to diagnostic error, active configuration error, or<br />

other<br />

4.4.1.4 Pending Configuration Change State<br />

When in the pending configuration change state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset.executePendingConfiguration<br />

2) sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration<br />

If other commands need to be sent, an abort shall be sent first<br />

b) If the TSS receives a sensorSystemReset.abortPendingConfiguration or the manufacturer-specified<br />

time to wait for the execution has passed, the pending configuration change shall be aborted and the<br />

TSS shall return to the previous state<br />

c) If the TSS receives a sensorSystemReset.executePendingConfiguration, the TSS shall transition to<br />

the initializing state and begin the manufacturer-specific initialization steps<br />

4.4.1.5 Validating Pending Configuration State<br />

When in the validating pending configuration state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration<br />

If other commands need to be sent, an abort is required to be sent first<br />

b) Once the TSS successfully validates the pending configuration file, the state may change to pending<br />

configuration change<br />

c) If the validation found a fault in the pending configuration file, the state may change to pending<br />

configuration error<br />

4.4.1.6 Diagnostic Error State<br />

When in the diagnostic error state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset:restart<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 67<br />

2) sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

3) sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

4) sensorSystemReset:retune<br />

5) sensorSystemReset:resyncSamplingPeriods<br />

6) sensorSystemReset:shortDiagnostics<br />

7) sensorSystemReset:fullDiagnostics<br />

b) Depending upon the manufacturer and the specific error that occurred, the TSS may return to ‘oK’<br />

state if the error clears<br />

c) The TSS shall remain in the diagnostic error state if an active configuration error also exists until one<br />

<strong>of</strong> the sensorSystemReset commands is issued<br />

4.4.1.7 Active Configuration Error State<br />

When in the active configuration error state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset:reinitializeUserSettings<br />

2) sensorSystemReset:restoreFactoryDefaults<br />

3) sensorSystemReset:shortDiagnostics<br />

4) sensorSystemReset:fullDiagnostics<br />

5) sensorSystemReset:validatePendingConfiguration<br />

b) The error may be cleared at the TSS. If this happens, the state transitions to ‘oK’<br />

4.4.1.8 Pending Configuration Error State<br />

When in the pending configuration error state, the following rules shall apply:<br />

a) The TSS shall process the following sensorSystemReset commands:<br />

1) sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration<br />

If other commands need to be sent, an abort is sent first<br />

b) If the TSS receives a sensorSystemReset:abortPendingConfiguration command, the TSS returns to<br />

the previous state<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 68<br />

Section 5<br />

MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE (MIB)<br />

[Normative]<br />

Section 5 defines those objects that are expected to be used by transportation sensor systems (TSS).<br />

The objects are presented using the OBJECT-TYPE macro as specified in RFC 1212 and <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004<br />

v02. The text provided from Section 5.1 through the end <strong>of</strong> Section 5 (except the section headings)<br />

constitutes the <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 <strong>Standard</strong> TSS MIB.<br />

This is an architecture that is a proposed component for the National ITS Architecture. The architecture<br />

diagram identifies some <strong>of</strong> the terms and acronyms described above, in addition to identifying the focus<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. The tree structure identifies how the data element definitions are combined under<br />

specific nodes. See Annex B for a figure that provides a pictorial representation <strong>of</strong> the TSS Branch and<br />

Tree Structure.<br />

In general, Section 5 presents the objects in lexigraphical order <strong>of</strong> their OBJECT IDENTIFIERS, which<br />

correspond to their physical location within the global naming tree. Most <strong>of</strong> the objects defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong> v02 reside under the ‘tss’ node <strong>of</strong> the global naming tree. To aid in object management, the ‘tss’<br />

node has been subdivided into logical categories, each defined by a node under the ‘tss’ node. The<br />

individual objects are then located under the appropriate node.<br />

Conformance requirements for any object are determined by the use <strong>of</strong> the Requirements Traceability<br />

Matrix (RTM) in Annex A. To support any defined Requirement, an implementation shall support all<br />

objects to which the Requirement traces in the RTM. The value <strong>of</strong> the STATUS field for every object in<br />

the MIB is ‘mandatory’, and indicates that it is mandatory if any associated Requirement is selected.<br />

For all bitmapped objects, if a bit is zero (0), then the referenced function is disabled or not supported,<br />

and if a bit is one (1), then the referenced function is enabled or supported.<br />

The full standardized range <strong>of</strong> all objects defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 shall be supported, except as<br />

otherwise noted. This MIB is managed by the <strong>NTCIP</strong> TSS Working Group and proprietary features should<br />

be defined through vendor-specific nodes in vendor-specific extensions to this MIB. All values not<br />

explicitly defined (e.g., enumerated values not listed, bits not defined, etc.) are reserved for future use by<br />

the TSS Working Group.<br />

5.1 TRANSPORTATION SENSOR SYSTEM OBJECTS<br />

--***************************************************************************<br />

-- Filename: <strong>NTCIP</strong><strong>1209</strong>v0217.mib<br />

-- Description: This MIB defines the object definitions for transportation<br />

-- sensor systems (TSS)<br />

-- Source: <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>v0217<br />

-- MIB Revision History:<br />

-- 2005 <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 v01 approved<br />

-- 2008 Completed <strong>1209</strong> TSS Version v02 drafting<br />

-- 2010..........edited for publication<br />

--<br />

-- Copyright 2010, 2003-2008 by the American Association <strong>of</strong> State Highway<br />

-- and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>of</strong> Transportation<br />

-- Engineers (ITE), and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association<br />

-- (NEMA). All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to,<br />

-- the rights <strong>of</strong> reproduction, translation and display are reserved under the<br />

-- laws <strong>of</strong> the United States <strong>of</strong> America, the Universal Copyright Convention<br />

-- the Berne Convention, and the International and Pan-American Copyright<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 69<br />

-- Conventions. Except as licensed and permitted, you may not copy these<br />

-- materials without prior written permission from AASHTO, ITE, or NEMA.<br />

-- Use <strong>of</strong> these materials does not give you any rights <strong>of</strong> ownership or<br />

-- claim <strong>of</strong> copyright in or to these materials.<br />

--<br />

-- Joint NEMA, AASHTO, and ITE<br />

-- <strong>NTCIP</strong> Management Information Base<br />

-- DISTRIBUTION NOTICE<br />

--<br />

-- To the extent that these materials are distributed by AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

-- in the form <strong>of</strong> a Data Dictionary ("DD") or Management Information Base<br />

-- ("MIB"), AASHTO / ITE / NEMA extend the following permission:<br />

-- You may make and / or distribute unlimited copies, including derivative<br />

-- works, <strong>of</strong> the DD or MIB, including copies for commercial distribution,<br />

-- provided that:<br />

-- (i) each copy you make and / or distribute contains the citation "Derived<br />

-- from <strong>NTCIP</strong> 0000 [insert the document number]. Used by permission <strong>of</strong> AASHTO<br />

-- / ITE / NEMA.";<br />

-- (ii) the copies or derivative works are not made part <strong>of</strong> the standards<br />

-- publications or works <strong>of</strong>fered by other standards developing organizations<br />

-- or publishers or as works-for-hire not associated with commercial hardware<br />

-- or s<strong>of</strong>tware products intended for field implementation;<br />

-- (iii) use <strong>of</strong> the DD or MIB is restricted in that the syntax fields may be<br />

-- modified only to reflect a more restrictive subrange or enumerated value;<br />

-- (iv) the description field may be modified but only to the extent that:<br />

-- (a) only those bit values or enumerated values that are supported are<br />

-- listed; and (b) the more restrictive subrange is expressed.<br />

--<br />

-- These materials are delivered "AS IS" without any warranties as to their<br />

-- use or performance.<br />

--<br />

-- AASHTO / ITE / NEMA and their suppliers do not warrant the performance<br />

-- or results you may obtain by using these materials. AASHTO / ITE / NEMA<br />

-- and their suppliers make no warranties, express or implied, as to<br />

-- noninfringement <strong>of</strong> third party rights, merchantability, or fitness for any<br />

-- particular purpose. In no event will AASHTO / ITE / NEMA or their<br />

-- suppliers be liable to you or any third party for any claim or for any<br />

-- consequential, incidental or special damages, including any lost pr<strong>of</strong>its<br />

-- or lost savings, arising from your reproduction or use <strong>of</strong> these materials,<br />

-- even if an AASHTO / ITE / NEMA representative has been advised <strong>of</strong> the<br />

-- possibility <strong>of</strong> such damages.<br />

--<br />

-- Some states or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation <strong>of</strong><br />

-- incidental, consequential or special damages, or the exclusion <strong>of</strong> implied<br />

-- warranties, so the above limitations may not apply to you.<br />

--<br />

-- Use <strong>of</strong> these materials does not constitute an endorsement or affiliation by<br />

-- or between AASHTO, ITE, or NEMA and you, your company, or your products and<br />

-- services.<br />

--<br />

-- If you are unwilling to accept the foregoing restrictions, you should<br />

-- immediately return these materials.<br />

--<br />

-- <strong>NTCIP</strong> is a trademark <strong>of</strong> AASHTO / ITE / NEMA.<br />

--****************************************************************************<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong><strong>1209</strong>v02-MIB1 DEFINITIONS::= BEGIN<br />

IMPORTS<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 70<br />

IpAddress, Counter<br />

FROM RFC1155-SMI<br />

OBJECT-TYPE<br />

FROM RFC-1212<br />

DisplayString<br />

FROM RFC1213-MIB<br />

OwnerString, BITMAP8, BITMAP16, BITMAP32, tss<br />

FROM <strong>NTCIP</strong>8004 v02<br />

-- Additional textual conventions.<br />

BITMAP64 ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE (8))<br />

BITMAP96 ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE (12))<br />

BITMAP256 ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE (32))<br />

-- For the purpose <strong>of</strong> this section, the following OBJECT IDENTIFIERS<br />

-- are used:<br />

-- the node location is: nema / transportation<br />

5.2 SENSOR CONFIGURATION AND CAPABILITY OBJECTS<br />

tssSystemSetup OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { tss 1 }<br />

-- This node is an identifier used to group all objects for TSS sensor<br />

-- configurations that are common to all TSS.<br />

5.2.1 Sensor Reset, Resynchronization, and Diagnostics<br />

sensorSystemReset OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

restart (1),<br />

reinitializeUserSettings (2),<br />

restoreFactoryDefaults (3),<br />

retune (4),<br />

resyncSamplingPeriods (5),<br />

shortDiagnostics (6),<br />

fullDiagnostics (7),<br />

executePendingConfiguration (8),<br />

abortPendingConfiguration (9),<br />

validatePendingConfiguration (10),<br />

noResetInProgress (11)<br />

}<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A s<strong>of</strong>tware interface to initiate a reset <strong>of</strong> various functions <strong>of</strong><br />

the TSS. Execution <strong>of</strong> the command shall set this object to the value 0.<br />

The reset commands are described as follows:<br />

restart(1) - This command shall cause the unit to enter restart state<br />

and go through a complete shut-down and start-up process, causing a<br />

reset and initialization <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since most recent<br />

TSS initialization to a value <strong>of</strong> zero.<br />

reinitializeUserSettings(2) – This command shall cause the unit to flush<br />

all memory and reinitialize all settings to their user-defined default<br />

values, and reset and initialize the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since most recent<br />

TSS initialization to a value <strong>of</strong> zero.<br />

restoreFactoryDefaults(3) - This command shall cause the unit to flush<br />

all memory, restore all settings to their factory default values, and<br />

reset and initialize the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since most recent TSS<br />

initialization to a value <strong>of</strong> zero.<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 71<br />

retune(4) – This command recalibrates unit background settings for all<br />

zones without resetting or flushing <strong>of</strong> any collected data.<br />

resyncSamplingPeriods(5) – This command shall cause the unit to<br />

synchronize all startup sampling period clocks within one (1) second <strong>of</strong><br />

receiving the command and a reset and initialize <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong><br />

seconds since most recent TSS initialization to a value <strong>of</strong> zero.<br />

shortDiagnostics(6) – This command shall cause the unit to go through<br />

an abbreviated vendor-specific diagnostic routine which may be the same<br />

as full diagnostics for some vendors.<br />

fullDiagnostics(7) – This command shall cause the unit to go through<br />

a complete vendor-specific diagnostic routine which may be the same as<br />

short diagnostics for some vendors, causing a reset and initialization<br />

<strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since most recent TSS initialization to a<br />

value <strong>of</strong> zero.<br />

executePendingConfiguration(8) – The behavior <strong>of</strong> this command is<br />

dependent upon type <strong>of</strong> configuration file uploaded and is manufacturerspecific.<br />

Execution may result in a system reboot, reinitialization,<br />

and loss <strong>of</strong> historical data.<br />

abortPendingConfiguration(9) – This command shall cause the TSS<br />

to cancel the currently pending configuration changes.<br />

validatePendingConfiguration(10) – This command is used to check the<br />

configuration to ensure that it is a valid configuration file.<br />

noResetInProgress(11) – No command is in-progress. All other commands<br />

shall set this object to this state upon completion. This value is<br />

read-only.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.1"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 1 }<br />

5.2.2 Sensor System Status<br />

sensorSystemStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

oK (2),<br />

initializing (3),<br />

pendingConfigurationChange (4),<br />

validatingPendingConfiguration (5),<br />

diagError (6),<br />

activeConfigError (7),<br />

pendingConfigError (8) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

"This data element provides an indication <strong>of</strong> the overall sensor<br />

system status, as follows:<br />

other(1) - Indicates the presence <strong>of</strong> a hardware or s<strong>of</strong>tware status that<br />

is not designated as either OK or initializing;<br />

oK(2) - Indicates that the unit is operating normally with no known<br />

hardware <strong>of</strong> s<strong>of</strong>tware faults, with no implications about data;<br />

initializing(3) - Indicates that the unit has encountered no fault, but<br />

is not ready for detection.<br />

pendingConfigurationChange(4) - Indicates there is a new configuration<br />

that is implemented in the TSS upon the executePendingConfiguration<br />

command.<br />

validatingPendingConfiguration (5) - Indicates that the TSS is<br />

checking that the downloaded file is a valid configuration file.<br />

diagError (6) - Indicates that a hardware malfunction has been<br />

identified.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 72<br />

activeConfigError (7) - Indicates that the current configuration being<br />

used in the TSS is invalid.<br />

pendingConfigError (8) - Indicates that the pending configuration file<br />

is invalid.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.2"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 2 }<br />

5.2.3 Sensor System Occupancy Type<br />

sensorSystemOccupancyType OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

normalizedOtherOccupancy (1),<br />

nonNormalizedOccupancy (2),<br />

zoneOccupancy (3),<br />

normalizedSixFootLoopOccupancy (4),<br />

normalizedTwoMeterLoopOccupancy (5),<br />

normalizedPointOccupancy (6)}<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates how to interpret the occupancy data <strong>of</strong> this TSS.<br />

normalizedOtherOccupancy(1) - Occupancy is normalized to other<br />

specific criteria that is not defined by other enumerated entries <strong>of</strong><br />

this data element. Use <strong>of</strong> this enumeration should be done carefully<br />

as it could effect interoperability <strong>of</strong> equipment.<br />

nonNormalizedOccupancy(2) - Occupancy is presented as non-normalized or<br />

raw occupancy data.<br />

zoneOccupancy(3) - Occupancy is presented for a given zone.<br />

normalizedSixFootLoopOccupancy(4) - Occupancy is normalized to a 6-foot<br />

by 6-foot loop.<br />

normalizedTwoMeterLoopOccupancy(5) - Occupancy is normalized to a 2-<br />

meter by 2-meter loop.<br />

normalizedPointOccupancy(6) - Occupancy is normalized to a point.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.3"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 3 }<br />

5.2.4 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zones Parameter<br />

maxSensorZones OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the maximum number <strong>of</strong> sensor zones supported by this<br />

TSS.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.4"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 4 }<br />

5.2.5 Sensor Zone Table<br />

sensorZoneTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SensorZoneEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A table containing sensor zone unit parameters. The number <strong>of</strong><br />

rows in this table is equal to the maxSensorZones data element. Table rows are<br />

set by the manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 5}<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 73<br />

sensorZoneEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SensorZoneEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table for sensor zone parameters."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { sensorZoneTable 1 }<br />

SensorZoneEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

sensorZoneNumber<br />

sensorZoneOptions<br />

sensorZoneOptionsStatus<br />

sensorZoneSamplePeriod<br />

sensorZoneLabel<br />

sensorZoneAndOperator<br />

sensorZoneOrOperator<br />

sensorZonePairedZone<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneOptions<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing<br />

sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor<br />

sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength<br />

sensorZoneLength<br />

sensorZoneStatus<br />

sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime<br />

sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime<br />

sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime<br />

sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold<br />

}<br />

INTEGER,<br />

BITMAP8,<br />

BITMAP8,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

OCTET STRING,<br />

BITMAP64,<br />

BITMAP64,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

BITMAP8,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER,<br />

INTEGER<br />

5.2.5.1 Sensor Zone Number<br />

sensorZoneNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The numerical label or number <strong>of</strong> the sensor zone. This value<br />

shall not exceed the maxSensorZones data element value. sensorZoneNumber is<br />

used as an index for various data element tables.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.1"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 1 }<br />

5.2.5.2 Sensor Zone Options<br />

sensorZoneOptions OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below for commanding this sensor<br />

zone to be ENABLED or DISABLED. A non-configured system shall default to<br />

DISABLED.<br />

<br />

bit 7 0=DISABLED, 1=ENABLED To command this sensor zone to be enabled or<br />

disabled;<br />

bits 6..0<br />

Reserved (bit 0=LSB)<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.2"<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 74<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 2 }<br />

5.2.5.3 Sensor Zone Options Status<br />

sensorZoneOptionsStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below for indicating the status <strong>of</strong><br />

whether this sensor zone is ENABLED or DISABLED. A zones options status may be<br />

disabled even though the status is set to enabled. This can occur if the<br />

sensor has automatically disabled a zone. Example: The TSS is a camera that<br />

has Pan/Tilt/Zoom control and the camera is temporarily moved for a<br />

surveillance operation. All <strong>of</strong> the zones on this camera would be automatically<br />

disabled until the camera had been returned to its original position.<br />

<br />

bit 7 0=DISABLED, 1=ENABLED To indicate the status <strong>of</strong> this sensor zone;<br />

bits 6..0<br />

Reserved (bit 0=LSB).<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.3"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 3 }<br />

5.2.5.4 Sensor Zone Sample Period Parameter<br />

sensorZoneSamplePeriod OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Duration <strong>of</strong> the sample period in seconds for the sensor zone<br />

over which time data is collected. Sample period durations from 0 to 3600 are<br />

available for use. Values from 3601.to.65535 are reserved for future use. A<br />

sampling period <strong>of</strong> zero (0) means that data is not being collected, while the<br />

sensor zone may continue to be enabled.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.4"<br />

DEFVAL { 0 }<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 4 }<br />

5.2.5.5 Sensor Zone Label<br />

sensorZoneLabel OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(8..255))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A text string used to describe the TSS sensor zone. A maximum<br />

string length <strong>of</strong> less than 255 may be supported.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.5"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 5 }<br />

5.2.5.6 Sensor Zone Boolean AND Operator<br />

sensorZoneAndOperator OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP64<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This data element identifies up to eight (8) unique zones that<br />

can be sequentially combined with a Boolean AND command to provide an input to<br />

this zone, as follows:<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 75<br />

<br />

Byte 1 Sensor zone number for the first Boolean AND combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 2 Sensor zone number for the second Boolean AND combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 3 Sensor zone number for the third Boolean AND combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 4 Sensor zone number for the fourth Boolean AND combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 5 Sensor zone number for the fifth Boolean AND combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 6 Sensor zone number for the sixth Boolean AND combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 7 Sensor zone number for the seventh Boolean AND combined with this<br />

zone,<br />

Byte 8 Sensor zone number for the eighth Boolean AND combined with this zone.<br />

Boolean AND combinations are processed before Boolean OR combinations. When<br />

read, this object returns last value written.<br />

-- This was TSS.orOperator:text in version v01.<br />

-- Corrected this typo because orOperator:text is used below.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.6"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 6 }<br />

5.2.5.7 Sensor Zone Boolean OR Operator<br />

sensorZoneOrOperator OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP64<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This data element identifies up to eight (8) unique zones that<br />

can be sequentially combined with a Boolean OR command to provide an input to<br />

this zone, as follows:<br />

<br />

Byte 1 Sensor zone number for the first Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 2 Sensor zone number for the second Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 3 Sensor zone number for the third Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 4 Sensor zone number for the fourth Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 5 Sensor zone number for the fifth Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 6 Sensor zone number for the sixth Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 7 Sensor zone number for the seventh Boolean OR combined with this zone,<br />

Byte 8 Sensor zone number for the eighth Boolean OR combined with this zone.<br />

Boolean AND combinations are processed before Boolean OR combinations. When<br />

read, this object returns last value written.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.7"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 7 }<br />

5.2.5.8 Sensor Zone Paired Zone<br />

sensorZonePairedZone OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..255)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is a zone that provides additional information to the<br />

current zone for features that require a sequenced second zone to determine<br />

direction <strong>of</strong> travel or time <strong>of</strong> travel (e.g., speed trap, wrong way, etc.)<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.8"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 8 }<br />

5.2.5.9 Sensor Zone Paired Zone Options<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneOptions OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 76<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below for indicating the status <strong>of</strong><br />

the options for a paired zone.<br />

<br />

bit 0 0=OFF, 1=ON For a Sensor Zone operating in pairs the Zone<br />

Placement Option ON indicates that the zone is<br />

the leading zone <strong>of</strong> the pair and Zone Placement<br />

Option OFF indicates that the zone is a trailing<br />

zone in the pair.<br />

bit 1 0=OFF, 1=ON For a Sensor Zone operating in pairs the Single<br />

Zone Speed Mode Option is only used when there<br />

is an error on one <strong>of</strong> the paired zones. This<br />

parameter identifies how the TSS should<br />

calculate speed without the other zone. OFF<br />

indicates a manufacturer specific calculation<br />

and a Single Zone Speed Mode Option ON indicates<br />

the use <strong>of</strong> the calculation Speed = (Average<br />

Vehicle Length + Zone Length) / Detect Time.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.9"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 9 }<br />

5.2.5.10 Sensor Zone Paired Zone Spacing<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter allows the user to set the spacing between paired<br />

zones for use in calculating vehicle speeds. This parameter is usually<br />

measured from the leading edge <strong>of</strong> one zone to the leading edge <strong>of</strong> the paired<br />

zone.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.10"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 10 }<br />

5.2.5.11 Sensor Zone Speed Correction Factor<br />

sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..20000)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is a percent multiplier for speed calculations within the<br />

TSS that is used to fine tune the accuracy <strong>of</strong> the reported speed. A setting <strong>of</strong><br />

1000 would be a multiplier <strong>of</strong> 1.000.<br />

one one-thousandth <strong>of</strong> a percent<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.11"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 11 }<br />

5.2.5.12 Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length<br />

sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..4000)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter allows the user to set the average vehicle length<br />

for use in determining speed and classification. This allows for a range <strong>of</strong><br />

lengths between 0.01 meters to 40 meters in length<br />

one-hundredth <strong>of</strong> a meter<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.12"<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 77<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 12}<br />

5.2.5.13 Sensor Zone Length Parameter<br />

sensorZoneLength OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..4000 | 65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter allows the user to set the length <strong>of</strong> the sensor<br />

zone. The value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent no zone length set.<br />

This allows for a range <strong>of</strong> lengths between 0.01 meters to 40 meters in length.<br />

one-hundredth <strong>of</strong> a meter<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.13"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 13 }<br />

5.2.5.14 Sensor Zone Status<br />

sensorZoneStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

oK (2),<br />

initializing (3),<br />

noActivity (4),<br />

maxPresence (5),<br />

configurationError (6),<br />

erraticCounts (7),<br />

disabled (8),<br />

overrideActive (9),<br />

sensorFailure (10),<br />

inputDataIntegrity (11),<br />

poorContrast (12),<br />

detectionAutoSuspended (13),<br />

pairedZoneFault (14) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Detailed status returned as result <strong>of</strong> diagnostics, as follows:<br />

Value Meaning<br />

other(1) - Indicates an error has occurred within the TSS for which<br />

there is no defined definition within this data element,<br />

oK(2) - Indicates no other status values apply,<br />

initializing(3) - Indicates an initialization or diagnostics procedure<br />

is in-progress,<br />

noActivity(4) - Indicates no activity condition,<br />

maxPresence(5) - Indicates max presence condition,<br />

configurationError(6) - Indicates an error within the TSS<br />

configuration setup,<br />

erraticCounts(7 )- Indicates erratic counts,<br />

disabled(8) - Indicates that the zone is disabled.<br />

overrideActive(9) - Indicates an override is active.<br />

sensorFailure(10) - Indicates a sensing element failure.<br />

inputDataIntegrity(11) - Indicates input values are not sufficient to<br />

determine detector data accurately (e.g., bad communications, invalid<br />

video for machine vision)<br />

poorContrast(12) - Indicates insufficient contrast error condition.<br />

detectionAutoSuspended(13) - Indicates that the detection zone was<br />

automatically disabled by the TSS (e.g., camera is on a PTZ and<br />

was moved).<br />

pairedZoneFault(14) - Indicates that there was no problem with this<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 78<br />

zone, but a zone that it is paired with had a fault. This may affect<br />

the accuracy <strong>of</strong> data reported by this zone.<br />

If a condition occurs during the sample period, then that state remains for<br />

the duration <strong>of</strong> that sample period. If multiple conditions occur during a<br />

sample period, the last reported condition, other than OK, is retained.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.14"<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 14 }<br />

5.2.5.15 Sensor Zone No Activity Fault Time<br />

sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Time period in seconds for the sensor zone during which, if<br />

there is no activity for the zone, a No Activity status is generated for the<br />

zone. A no activity fault time <strong>of</strong> zero (0) means that a no activity status<br />

cannot be generated for this sensor zone.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.15"<br />

DEFVAL { 0 }<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 15 }<br />

5.2.5.16 Sensor Zone Max Presence Fault Time<br />

sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Time period in seconds for the sensor zone during which, if<br />

there is constant activity for the zone, a Max Presence status is generated<br />

for the zone. A max presence fault time <strong>of</strong> zero (0) means that a max presence<br />

status can not be generated for this sensor zone.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.16"<br />

DEFVAL { 0 }<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 16 }<br />

5.2.5.17 Sensor Zone Erratic Counts Fault Time<br />

sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Time period in seconds for the sensor zone during which, if the<br />

Erratic Counts Threshold is created for the zone, an Erratic Counts status is<br />

generated for the zone. An erratic counts fault time <strong>of</strong> zero (0) means that an<br />

erratic counts status can not be generated for this sensor zone.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.17"<br />

DEFVAL { 0 }<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 17 }<br />

5.2.5.18 Sensor Zone Erratic Counts Threshold<br />

sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 79<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The counts that if a sensor zone’s number <strong>of</strong> actuations meets or<br />

exceeds within the Erratic Counts Fault Time an Erratic Counts status is<br />

generated for the zone. An erratic counts threshold <strong>of</strong> zero (0) means that an<br />

erratic counts status can not be generated for this sensor zone.<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.5.1.18"<br />

DEFVAL { 0 }<br />

::= { sensorZoneEntry 18 }<br />

5.2.6 Clock Available<br />

clockAvailable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

clockYes (1),<br />

clockNo (2) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates availability <strong>of</strong> a real time clock within the TSS so<br />

that time can be referenced to CTime.<br />

clockYes(1) - A real time clock is provided within the TSS,<br />

conformant with <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201, and time is referenced to actual local time<br />

within the device.<br />

clockNo(2) - A real time clock is not provided within the TSS and<br />

time is expressed in the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since most recent TSS<br />

initialization.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.6"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 6 }<br />

5.2.7 Sensor Technology<br />

sensorTechnology OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

inductiveLoop (2),<br />

machineVision (3) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the sensor technology used by this TSS.<br />

other(1) - Any TSS that is not currently covered by this<br />

standard. (e.g., microwave detectors)<br />

inductive loop (2) - A physical detector <strong>of</strong> coiled wire that is<br />

embedded in the driving surface that senses changes in magnetic<br />

field as vehicles pass over.<br />

machine vision (3) - A non intrusive detection methodology<br />

where in a video image <strong>of</strong> the driving surface is processed to<br />

determine the passage <strong>of</strong> a vehicle.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.7"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 7 }<br />

5.2.8 Maximum Sample Data Entries<br />

maxSampleDataEntries OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..4)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 80<br />

" Indicates the maximum number <strong>of</strong> historical data entries per zone<br />

supported by the TSS.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.8"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 8 }<br />

5.2.9 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Characters<br />

maxNumberOfCharacters OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (8..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The maximum number <strong>of</strong> characters per identifier label that the<br />

TSS supports.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.9"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 9 }<br />

5.2.10 Functional Capabilities<br />

functionalCapabilities OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below for identifying the<br />

functional capabilities <strong>of</strong> the TSS.<br />

<br />

bit 0 0=NOT SUPPORTED, 1=SUPPORTED Sampling Features<br />

bit 1 0=NOT SUPPORTED, 1=SUPPORTED Timing Features<br />

bit 2 0=NOT SUPPORTED, 1=SUPPORTED Speed Features<br />

bits 3..7<br />

Reserved (bit 7=MSB)<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.10"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 10 }<br />

5.2.11 External Arming Inputs<br />

externalArmingInputs OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP64<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This allows other devices to modify the states <strong>of</strong> the Arming<br />

Input Bits used by the TSS. There are separate clears and sets so that<br />

multiple TSSs could maintain the states <strong>of</strong> individual Arming Input Bits. It is<br />

envisioned that the first 24 bits would correspond to the Greens, Yellows, and<br />

Reds <strong>of</strong> phases 1 through 8 from the traffic signal controller. The last 8 bits<br />

would be used for other phases, overlaps, or special functions. If the Arming<br />

Pin inputs are DC then a low input is an ON and a high input is an OFF. If the<br />

Arming Pin inputs are AC then a low input is an OFF and a high input is an ON.<br />

<br />

byte 1 Bit 0 = Clear Arming Input bit 1,<br />

Bit 1 = Clear Arming Input bit 2,<br />

Bit 2 = Clear Arming Input bit 3,<br />

Bit 3 = Clear Arming Input bit 4,<br />

Bit 4 = Clear Arming Input bit 5,<br />

Bit 5 = Clear Arming Input bit 6,<br />

Bit 6 = Clear Arming Input bit 7,<br />

Bit 7 = Clear Arming Input bit 8,<br />

byte 2 Bit 0 = Clear Arming Input bit 9,<br />

Bit 1 = Clear Arming Input bit 10,<br />

Bit 2 = Clear Arming Input bit 11,<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 81<br />

Bit 3 = Clear Arming Input bit 12,<br />

Bit 4 = Clear Arming Input bit 13,<br />

Bit 5 = Clear Arming Input bit 14,<br />

Bit 6 = Clear Arming Input bit 15,<br />

Bit 7 = Clear Arming Input bit 16,<br />

byte 3 Bit 0 = Clear Arming Input bit 17,<br />

Bit 1 = Clear Arming Input bit 18,<br />

Bit 2 = Clear Arming Input bit 19,<br />

Bit 3 = Clear Arming Input bit 20,<br />

Bit 4 = Clear Arming Input bit 21,<br />

Bit 5 = Clear Arming Input bit 22,<br />

Bit 6 = Clear Arming Input bit 23,<br />

Bit 7 = Clear Arming Input bit 24,<br />

byte 4 Bit 0 = Clear Arming Input bit 25,<br />

Bit 1 = Clear Arming Input bit 26,<br />

Bit 2 = Clear Arming Input bit 27,<br />

Bit 3 = Clear Arming Input bit 28,<br />

Bit 4 = Clear Arming Input bit 29,<br />

Bit 5 = Clear Arming Input bit 30,<br />

Bit 6 = Clear Arming Input bit 31,<br />

Bit 7 = Clear Arming Input bit 32,<br />

byte 5 Bit 0 = Set Arming Input bit 1,<br />

Bit 1 = Set Arming Input bit 2,<br />

Bit 2 = Set Arming Input bit 3,<br />

Bit 3 = Set Arming Input bit 4,<br />

Bit 4 = Set Arming Input bit 5,<br />

Bit 5 = Set Arming Input bit 6,<br />

Bit 6 = Set Arming Input bit 7,<br />

Bit 7 = Set Arming Input bit 8,<br />

byte 6 Bit 0 = Set Arming Input bit 9,<br />

Bit 1 = Set Arming Input bit 10,<br />

Bit 2 = Set Arming Input bit 11,<br />

Bit 3 = Set Arming Input bit 12,<br />

Bit 4 = Set Arming Input bit 13,<br />

Bit 5 = Set Arming Input bit 14,<br />

Bit 6 = Set Arming Input bit 15,<br />

Bit 7 = Set Arming Input bit 16,<br />

byte 7 Bit 0 = Set Arming Input bit 17,<br />

Bit 1 = Set Arming Input bit 18,<br />

Bit 2 = Set Arming Input bit 19,<br />

Bit 3 = Set Arming Input bit 20,<br />

Bit 4 = Set Arming Input bit 21,<br />

Bit 5 = Set Arming Input bit 22,<br />

Bit 6 = Set Arming Input bit 23,<br />

Bit 7 = Set Arming Input bit 24,<br />

byte 8 Bit 0 = Set Arming Input bit 25,<br />

Bit 1 = Set Arming Input bit 26,<br />

Bit 2 = Set Arming Input bit 27,<br />

Bit 3 = Set Arming Input bit 28,<br />

Bit 4 = Set Arming Input bit 29,<br />

Bit 5 = Set Arming Input bit 30,<br />

Bit 6 = Set Arming Input bit 31,<br />

Bit 7 = Set Arming Input bit 32,<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.11"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 11 }<br />

5.2.12 Output Conditioning Table<br />

-- The outputConditioningTable replaces the loopOutputConditioningTable that<br />

-- is used in the TSS <strong>1209</strong> version v01 standard.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 82<br />

outputConditioningTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OutputConditioningEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Each table row contains objects for configuring detector sensor<br />

zone outputs. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table is equal to maxSensorZones.<br />

Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is not<br />

supported.<br />

static<br />


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 83<br />

5.2.12.2 Zone Maximum Presence Time<br />

sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This object sets the maximum time that the zone holds presence<br />

before retuning. Values <strong>of</strong> 1 to 65534 seconds are available. A value <strong>of</strong> 0<br />

disables this timer and prevents a sensor zone occupancy from being tuned out<br />

at the end <strong>of</strong> a specific time. A value <strong>of</strong> 65,535 represents invalid data.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.2"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 2 }<br />

5.2.12.3 Zone Output Delay Time<br />

sensorZoneOutputDelayTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The output for the zone is delayed from start <strong>of</strong> sensor zone<br />

occupancy by the time specified (tenths <strong>of</strong> a second: 00.0 to 6553.5 sec). For<br />

the output to actually switch, the sensor zone occupancy is required to be<br />

continuous and still be present at the end <strong>of</strong> the delay time.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> a second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.3"<br />

REFERENCE<br />

"NEMA TS2 Clause 3.5.5.5.4.c and 6.5.2.24.1"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 3 }<br />

5.2.12.4 Zone Output Delay Mode Parameter<br />

sensorZoneOutputDelayMode OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

delayEnablesHaveNoEffect (1),<br />

delayEnablesORedActive (2),<br />

delayEnablesORedNotActive (3),<br />

delayEnablesANDedActive (4),<br />

delayEnablesANDedNotActive (5) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter determines if and how the delay enables are used<br />

to modify the operation <strong>of</strong> the delay feature.<br />

delayEnablesHaveNoEffect(1) – The delay enables have no effect on the<br />

delay feature <strong>of</strong> the zone.<br />

delayEnablesORedActive(2) - If any <strong>of</strong> the delay enables are active the<br />

delay feature is active, else the delay feature is not active.<br />

delayEnablesORedNotActive(3) - If any <strong>of</strong> the delay enables are active<br />

the delay feature is not active, else the delay feature is inactive.<br />

delayEnablesANDedActive(4) - If all <strong>of</strong> the delay enables are active the<br />

delay feature is active, else the delay feature is not active.<br />

delayEnablesANDedNotActive(5) - If all <strong>of</strong> the delay enables are active<br />

the delay feature is not active, else the delay feature is active.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.4"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 4 }<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 84<br />

5.2.12.5 Zone Output Delay Enables<br />

sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP96<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This bit-mapped parameter identifies which Arming Pins, Arming<br />

Input Bits, and which state for each are to be used as enables for the delay<br />

feature. If the Arming Pin inputs are DC then a low input is an ON and a high<br />

input is an OFF. If the Arming Pin inputs are AC then a low input is an OFF<br />

and a high input is an ON.<br />

<br />

byte 1<br />

byte 2<br />

byte 3<br />

byte 4<br />

byte 5<br />

byte 6<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 1 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 2 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 3 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 4 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 5 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 6 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 7 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 8 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 9 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 10 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 11 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 12 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 13 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 14 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 15 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 16 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 1 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 2 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 3 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 4 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 5 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 6 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 7 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 8 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 9 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 10 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 11 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 12 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 13 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 14 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 15 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 16 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 1 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 2 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 3 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 4 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 5 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 6 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 7 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 8 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 9 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 10 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 11 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 12 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 13 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 14 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 15 OFF,<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 85<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 16 OFF,<br />

byte 7 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 17 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 18 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 19 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 20 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 21 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 22 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 23 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 24 OFF,<br />

byte 8 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 25 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 26 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 27 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 28 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 29 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 30 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 31 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 32 OFF,<br />

byte 9 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 1 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 2 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 3 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 4 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 5 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 6 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 7 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 8 ON,<br />

byte 10 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 9 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 10 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 11 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 12 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 13 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 14 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 15 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 16 ON,<br />

byte 11 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 17 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 18 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 19 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 20 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 21 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 22 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 23 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 24 ON,<br />

byte 12 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 25 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 26 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 27 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 28 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 29 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 30 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 31 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 32 ON,<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.5"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 5 }<br />

5.2.12.6 Zone Output Extend Time<br />

sensorZoneOutputExtendTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 86<br />

" The output for the zone is extended, after the end <strong>of</strong> the period<br />

in which the sensor zone is occupied, by the amount <strong>of</strong> time specified (tenths<br />

<strong>of</strong> a second: 00.0 to 6553.5 sec).<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> a second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.6"<br />

REFERENCE<br />

"NEMA TS2 Clause 3.5.5.5.4.d and 6.5.2.24.2"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 6 }<br />

5.2.12.7 Zone Output Extend Mode<br />

sensorZoneOutputExtendMode OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

extendEnablesHaveNoEffect (1),<br />

extendEnablesORedActive (2),<br />

extendEnablesORedNotActive (3),<br />

extendEnablesANDedActive (4),<br />

extendEnablesANDedNotActive (5) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter determines if and how the extend enables will be<br />

used to modify the operation <strong>of</strong> the extend feature.<br />

extendEnablesHaveNoEffect(1) - The extend enables have no effect on the<br />

extend feature <strong>of</strong> the zone.<br />

extendEnablesORedActive(2) - If any <strong>of</strong> the extend enables are active the<br />

extend feature is active, else the extend feature is not active.<br />

extendEnablesORedNotActive(3) - If any <strong>of</strong> the extend enables are active<br />

the extend feature is not active, else the extend feature is active.<br />

extendEnablesANDedActive(4) - If all the extend enables are active the<br />

extend feature is active, else the extend feature is not active.<br />

extendEnablesANDedNotActive(5) - If all <strong>of</strong> the extend enables are active<br />

the extend feature is not active, else the extend feature is active.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.7"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 7 }<br />

5.2.12.8 Zone Output Extend Enables<br />

sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP96<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This bit-mapped parameter identifies which Arming Pins, Arming<br />

Input Bits, and which state for each are to be used as enables for the extend<br />

feature. If the Arming Pin inputs are DC then a low input is an ON and a high<br />

input is an OFF. If the Arming Pin inputs are AC then a low input is an OFF<br />

and a high input is an ON.<br />

<br />

byte 1<br />

byte 2<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 1 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 2 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 3 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 4 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 5 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 6 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 7 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 8 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 9 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 10 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 11 OFF,<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 87<br />

byte 3<br />

Byte 4<br />

byte 5<br />

byte 6<br />

byte 7<br />

byte 8<br />

byte 9<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 12 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 13 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 14 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 15 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 16 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 1 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 2 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 3 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 4 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 5 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 6 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 7 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 8 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 9 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 10 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 11 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 12 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 13 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 14 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 15 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 16 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 1 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 2 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 3 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 4 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 5 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 6 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 7 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 8 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 9 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 10 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 11 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 12 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 13 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 14 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 15 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 16 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 17 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 18 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 19 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 20 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 21 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 22 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 23 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 24 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 25 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 26 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 27 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 28 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 29 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 30 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 31 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 32 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 1 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 2 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 3 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 4 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 5 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 6 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 7 ON,<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 88<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 8 ON,<br />

byte 10 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 9 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 10 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 11 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 12 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 13 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 14 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 15 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 16 ON,<br />

byte 11 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 17 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 18 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 19 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 20 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 21 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 22 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 23 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 24 ON,<br />

byte 12 Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 25 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 26 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 27 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 28 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 29 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 30 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 31 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 32 ON,<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.8"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 8 }<br />

5.2.12.9 Zone Output Sequenced<br />

sensorZoneOutputSequenced OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..255)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter identifies a zone that is required to have a<br />

detection before the zone associated with this output has a detection for this<br />

output to become active. This parameter can be used to create directional<br />

detection. If the zone associated with this output has a detection before the<br />

zone identified in this parameter, this output cannot be activated and the<br />

detection ceases before it can start watching the zone identified in this<br />

parameter. If the zone identified in this parameter has a detection and<br />

remains in detection, every time the zone associated with the output has a<br />

detection, its output is activated. The intent is that the two zones are in<br />

close enough proximity that a vehicle is able to be detected by both zones and<br />

that the last zone to detect the vehicle is the one that activates its output.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.12.1.9"<br />

::= { outputConditioningEntry 9 }<br />

5.2.13 Pending Configuration File Name<br />

pendingConfigurationFileName OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(8..32))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This identifies the name <strong>of</strong> the pending configuration file that<br />

is used by the TSS upon issuing the executePendingConfiguration command.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.1.13"<br />

::= { tssSystemSetup 13}<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 89<br />

5.3 SENSOR CONTROL OBJECTS<br />

tssControl OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { tss 2 }<br />

--node for output control data elements<br />

--a sensor zone can be mapped to any available output<br />

--outputs identify discrete activity states sensed within a zone<br />

--output states should be refreshed upon change <strong>of</strong> state for each output<br />

5.3.1 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Outputs<br />

maxOutputNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the maximum number <strong>of</strong> outputs supported by this TSS.<br />

output<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.1"<br />

::= { tssControl 1 }<br />

5.3.2 Output Configuration Table<br />

outputConfigurationTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OutputConfigurationEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing configuration data elements for each TSS<br />

physical output. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table is equal to the<br />

maxOutputNumber data element. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row<br />

creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2"<br />

::= { tssControl 2 }<br />

outputConfigurationEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OutputConfigurationEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Row containing output configuration data elements."<br />

INDEX { outputNumber }<br />

::= { outputConfigurationTable 1}<br />

OutputConfigurationEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

outputNumber<br />

INTEGER,<br />

outputSensorZoneNumber INTEGER,<br />

outputFailsafeMode<br />

INTEGER,<br />

outputModeStatus<br />

BITMAP8,<br />

outputLabel OCTET STRING (SIZE (8..255)),<br />

outputArmingEnables<br />

BITMAP96,<br />

outputArmingMode<br />

INTEGER<br />

}<br />

5.3.2.1 Output Number<br />

outputNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 90<br />

" The numerical label or number assigned to a physical output.<br />

Output number is also the row to which the outputConfigurationTable is<br />

referenced.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.1"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 1 }<br />

5.3.2.2 Output Sensor Zone Number<br />

outputSensorZoneNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..255)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

"The numerical label or number representing the sensor zone number<br />

that is associated with this output. A value <strong>of</strong> zero (0) indicated that no<br />

sensor zone number is associated with this output. When read, this data<br />

element returns the last value written.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.2"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 2}<br />

5.3.2.3 Output Failsafe Mode<br />

outputFailsafeMode OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

failsafeModeOn (1),<br />

failsafeModeOff (2),<br />

overrideCommandOn (3),<br />

overrideCommandOff (4),<br />

normal (5) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Data element that allows configuration <strong>of</strong> outputs for failure<br />

override modes, as follows:<br />

failsafeModeOn(1) - The output is set to the ON state whenever there is<br />

a failure that affects the proper performance <strong>of</strong> this output;<br />

failsafeModeOff(2) - The output is set to the OFF state whenever there<br />

is a failure that affects the proper performance <strong>of</strong> this output;<br />

overrideCommandOn(3) - The output is set to the ON state, overriding the<br />

normal operational state <strong>of</strong> the output;<br />

overrideCommandOff(4) - The output is set to the OFF state, overriding<br />

the normal operational state <strong>of</strong> the output;<br />

normal(5) - The output is returned to its normal operational state.<br />

When read, this data element returns the last value written except for<br />

the value <strong>of</strong> 5. After a value <strong>of</strong> 5 is written, the value prior to the<br />

normal command is returned.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.3"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 3 }<br />

5.3.2.4 Output Mode Status<br />

outputModeStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below for reading the status <strong>of</strong><br />

failure override modes, as follows:<br />

<br />

bit 7 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For Failsafe Mode Status ON indicates the<br />

Failsafe Mode is ON, meaning that the<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 91<br />

output assumes an ON state whenever there<br />

is a failure that in any way affects the<br />

proper performance <strong>of</strong> this output and<br />

Failsafe Mode Status OFF indicates the<br />

status <strong>of</strong> the Failsafe Mode is OFF,<br />

meaning that the output assumes an OFF<br />

state whenever there is a failure that in<br />

any way affects the proper performance <strong>of</strong><br />

this output (MSB);<br />

bit 6 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For Override Command Status ON indicates<br />

the presence <strong>of</strong> an Override to the normal<br />

operational state <strong>of</strong> the output to ON and<br />

Override Command Status Off indicates the<br />

presence <strong>of</strong> an Override to the normal<br />

operational state <strong>of</strong> the output to OFF;<br />

bit 5..0<br />

Reserved (bit 0 = LSB).<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.4"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 4 }<br />

5.3.2.5 Output Label<br />

outputLabel OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE (8..255))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Text string to describe the TSS output. A maximum string length<br />

<strong>of</strong> less than 255 may be supported.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.5"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 5 }<br />

5.3.2.6 Output Arming Enables<br />

outputArmingEnables OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP96<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Consists <strong>of</strong> up to 16 physical Arming Pins to the TSS and up to<br />

32 bits <strong>of</strong> external arming bits which can be controlled through this protocol.<br />

The Arming Pins have historically been connected to the phase greens but can<br />

be used for any purpose. It is envisioned that the phase green information<br />

could be sent through Arming Input Bits using the protocol and eliminate the<br />

need for additional wiring. If the Arming Pin inputs are DC then a low input<br />

is an ON and a high input is an OFF. If the Arming Pin inputs are AC then a<br />

low input is an OFF and a high input is an ON.<br />

<br />

byte 1<br />

byte 2<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 1 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 2 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 3 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 4 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 5 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 6 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 7 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 8 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 9 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 10 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 11 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 12 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 13 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 14 OFF,<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 92<br />

byte 3<br />

byte 4<br />

byte 5<br />

byte 6<br />

byte 7<br />

byte 8<br />

byte 9<br />

byte 10<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 15 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 16 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 1 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 2 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 3 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 4 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 5 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 6 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 7 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 8 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Pin 9 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Pin 10 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Pin 11 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Pin 12 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Pin 13 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Pin 14 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Pin 15 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Pin 16 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 1 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 2 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 3 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 4 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 5 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 6 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 7 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 8 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 9 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 10 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 11 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 12 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 13 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 14 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 15 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 16 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 17 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 18 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 19 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 20 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 21 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 22 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 23 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 24 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 25 OFF,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 26 OFF,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 27 OFF,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 28 OFF,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 29 OFF,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 30 OFF,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 31 OFF,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 32 OFF,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 1 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 2 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 3 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 4 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 5 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 6 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 7 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 8 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 9 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 10 ON,<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 93<br />

byte 11<br />

byte 12<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 11 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 12 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 13 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 14 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 15 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 16 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 17 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 18 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 19 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 20 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 21 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 22 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 23 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 24 ON,<br />

Bit 0 = Arming Input bit 25 ON,<br />

Bit 1 = Arming Input bit 26 ON,<br />

Bit 2 = Arming Input bit 27 ON,<br />

Bit 3 = Arming Input bit 28 ON,<br />

Bit 4 = Arming Input bit 29 ON,<br />

Bit 5 = Arming Input bit 30 ON,<br />

Bit 6 = Arming Input bit 31 ON,<br />

Bit 7 = Arming Input bit 32 ON.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.6"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 6 }<br />

5.3.2.7 Output Arming Mode<br />

outputArmingMode OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

armingEnablesHaveNoEffect (1),<br />

normOffArmingEnablesORedZone (2),<br />

normOnArmingEnablesORedZone (3),<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesORedOff (4),<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesORedOn (5),<br />

normOffArmingEnablesANDedZone (6),<br />

normOnArmingEnablesANDedZone (7),<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesANDedOff (8),<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesANDedOn (9)}<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This parameter determines if and how the Arming Enables are used<br />

to modify the operation <strong>of</strong> this output.<br />

armingEnablesHaveNoEffect(1) - The Arming Enables have no effect on the<br />

output <strong>of</strong> the zone.<br />

normOffArmingEnablesORedZone(2) - The zone output is OFF when none <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active, and the actual zone state when any <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active.<br />

normOnArmingEnablesORedZone(3) - The zone output is ON when none <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active, and the actual zone state when any <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active.<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesORedOff(4) - The zone output is the actual zone<br />

state when none <strong>of</strong> the Arming Enables are active, and OFF when any <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active.<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesORedOn(5) - The zone output is the actual zone<br />

state when none <strong>of</strong> the Arming Enables are active, and ON when any <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active.<br />

normOffArmingEnablesANDedZone(6) - The zone output is OFF when any <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are not active, and the actual zone state when all<br />

<strong>of</strong> the Arming Enables are active.<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 94<br />

normOnArmingEnablesANDedZone(7) - The zone output is ON when any <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are not active, and the actual zone state when all<br />

<strong>of</strong> the Arming Enables or active.<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesANDedOff(8) - The zone output is the actual zone<br />

state when any <strong>of</strong> the Arming Enables are not active, and OFF when all <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active.<br />

normZoneArmingEnablesANDedOn(9) - The zone output is the actual zone<br />

state when any <strong>of</strong> the Arming Enables are not active, and ON when all <strong>of</strong><br />

the Arming Enables are active.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.2.1.7"<br />

::= { outputConfigurationEntry 7 }<br />

5.3.3 Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Output Groups<br />

maxOutputGroups OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..32)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the maximum number <strong>of</strong> output groups supported by this<br />

TSS.<br />

output<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.3"<br />

::= { tssControl 3 }<br />

5.3.4 Output Group Table<br />

outputGroupTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OutputGroupEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A table containing input and output states for groups <strong>of</strong> eight<br />

outputs. Each output group represents a multiple <strong>of</strong> eight (8) sequentially<br />

numbered outputs. Output Group 1 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 1 to 8, Output Group 2<br />

consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 9 to 16, etc. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table is equal to<br />

the maxOutputGroups data element. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and<br />

row creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.4"<br />

::= { tssControl 4 }<br />

outputGroupEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OutputGroupEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table for output states, in groups <strong>of</strong> eight outputs. Each output<br />

group represents a multiple <strong>of</strong> eight (8) sequentially numbered outputs.<br />

Example: Output Group 1 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 1 to 8, Output Group 2 consists <strong>of</strong><br />

Outputs 9 to 16, etc."<br />

INDEX { outputGroupNumber }<br />

::= { outputGroupTable 1 }<br />

OutputGroupEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

outputGroupNumber<br />

outputGroupOutputState<br />

}<br />

INTEGER,<br />

BITMAP8<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 95<br />

5.3.4.1 Output Group Number<br />

outputGroupNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..32)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Number <strong>of</strong> the output group, in groups <strong>of</strong> eight outputs. Each<br />

output group represents a multiple <strong>of</strong> eight (8) sequentially numbered outputs.<br />

Output Group 1 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 1 to 8, Output Group 2 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs<br />

9 to 16, etc.<br />

output<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.4.1.1"<br />

::= { outputGroupEntry 1 }<br />

5.3.4.2 Output Group Output State<br />

outputGroupOutputState OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Each bit represents the output state for each output within each<br />

output group. Each output group represents a multiple <strong>of</strong> eight (8)<br />

sequentially numbered outputs. Example: Output Group 1 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 1<br />

to 8, Output Group 2 consists <strong>of</strong> Outputs 9 to 16, etc. Bit 0 represents output<br />

1, bit 1 represents output 2, etc., as follows:<br />

<br />

bit 7 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 8 within the group (MSB),<br />

bit 6 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 7 within the group,<br />

bit 5 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 6 within the group,<br />

bit 4 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 5 within the group,<br />

bit 3 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 4 within the group,<br />

bit 2 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 3 within the group,<br />

bit 1 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 2 within the group,<br />

bit 0 0 = OFF, 1 = ON For output 1 within the group (LSB).<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.2.4.1.2"<br />

::= { outputGroupEntry 2 }<br />

5.4 TSS DATA COLLECTION OBJECTS<br />

tssDataCollection OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { tss 3 }<br />

-- node for data collection elements<br />

5.4.1 Data Collection Table<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

dataCollectionTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF DataCollectionEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing the most recently completed sample period data.<br />

The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table is equal to the maxSensorZones data element.<br />

Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is not<br />

supported.<br />

If this object is supported, it reports the same data that is returned using<br />

the new object sampleDataTable with a sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a<br />

sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> two.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.1"<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 96<br />

::= { tssDataCollection 1 }<br />

dataCollectionEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX DataCollectionEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table for data collection parameters."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { dataCollectionTable 1 }<br />

DataCollectionEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

endTime<br />

Counter,<br />

volumeData INTEGER,<br />

percentOccupancy INTEGER,<br />

speedData<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneStatus INTEGER<br />

}<br />

5.4.1.1 End Time<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

endTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX Counter<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the time at which the data collection period ended for<br />

the data contained in this row, the most recently completed sample period. If<br />

the clockAvailable data element indicates the presence <strong>of</strong> a clock, this time<br />

shall be expressed in local time as expressed in the controllerLocalTime data<br />

element (see <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03); otherwise, this time shall be expressed in the<br />

number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the most recent TSS initialization.<br />

If this object is supported, it must report the same data that will be<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataTable.sampleEndTime, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> two.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.1.1.1"<br />

::= { dataCollectionEntry 1 }<br />

5.4.1.2 Volume Data<br />

--This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

volumeData OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Counts per sample period, for the most recently completed sample<br />

period. Counts are expressed as an integer value in the volumeData data<br />

element. The value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent a missing value. A<br />

missing value is reported when the zoneStatus is anything other than OK for<br />

the entire sampling period.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataTable.sampleVolumeData, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> two.<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.1.1.2"<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 97<br />

::= { dataCollectionEntry 2 }<br />

5.4.1.3 Percent Occupancy<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

percentOccupancy OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..1000 | 65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Percent occupancy over the sample period for the most recently<br />

completed sample period. Occupancy is expressed in tenths <strong>of</strong> a percent, from 0<br />

to 100.0 percent, in the percentOccupancy data element. The value <strong>of</strong> 65535<br />

shall be returned to represent an invalid or missing value. A missing value is<br />

reported when the zoneStatus is anything other than OK for the entire sampling<br />

period. Values 1001 through 65534 are reserved for future use.<br />

If this object is supported, it must report the same data that will be<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataTable.samplePercentOccupancy, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> two.<br />

percent<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.1.1.3"<br />

::= { dataCollectionEntry 3 }<br />

5.4.1.4 Speed Data<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

speedData OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..2550 | 65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Arithmetic mean <strong>of</strong> speeds collected over the sample period with<br />

units <strong>of</strong> 1/10ths <strong>of</strong> km/h, for the most recently completed sample period. For a<br />

volume <strong>of</strong> zero during the sample period, the value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned<br />

to represent an invalid or missing value. A missing value is reported when the<br />

zoneStatus returned indicates no other status values apply for the entire<br />

sampling period. Values 2551 through 65534 are reserved for future use.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataTable.sampleSpeedData, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> two.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> km/h<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.1.1.4"<br />

-- conversion to English units must be done within the application<br />

::= { dataCollectionEntry 4 }<br />

5.4.1.5 Zone Status<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

oK (2),<br />

initializing (3),<br />

noActivity (4),<br />

maxPresence (5),<br />

configurationError (6),<br />

erraticCounts (7),<br />

disabled (8),<br />

overrideActive (9),<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 98<br />

sensorFailure (10) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Detailed status returned as result <strong>of</strong> diagnostics, as follows:<br />

Value<br />

Meaning<br />

Other - Indicates an error has occurred within the TSS for which<br />

there is no defined definition within this data element,<br />

oK - Indicates no other status values apply,<br />

initializing - Indicates an initialization or diagnostics procedure is<br />

in-progress,<br />

noActivity - Indicates no activity condition,<br />

maxPresence - Indicates max presence condition,<br />

configurationError - Indicates an error within the TSS configuration<br />

setup,<br />

erraticCounts - Indicates erratic counts,<br />

disabled - Indicates that the zone is disabled.<br />

overrideActive - Indicates an override is active.<br />

sensorFailure - Indicates a sensing element failure.<br />

If a condition occurs during the sample period, then that state remains for<br />

the duration <strong>of</strong> that sample period. If multiple conditions occur during a<br />

sample period, the last reported condition, other than OK, is retained.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataTable.sampleZoneStatus, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> two.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.1.1.5"<br />

::= { dataCollectionEntry 5 }<br />

5.4.2 Data Buffer Table<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

dataBufferTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF DataBufferEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing the second most recently completed previous<br />

sample period data, which value is specified by the value <strong>of</strong> the<br />

sensorZoneSamplePeriod data element. The previous period data overwrites the<br />

data for the sample period data immediately preceding the previous sample<br />

period. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table is equal to the maxSensorZones data<br />

element. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is<br />

not supported.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object sampleDataTable with a sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one<br />

and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> three.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.2"<br />

::= { tssDataCollection 2 }<br />

dataBufferEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX DataBufferEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing the data collection parameters for the second<br />

most recently completed previous sample period."<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 99<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { dataBufferTable 1 }<br />

DataBufferEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

endTimeBuffer<br />

Counter,<br />

volumeDataBuffer INTEGER,<br />

percentOccupancyBuffer INTEGER,<br />

speedDataBuffer<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneStatusBuffer INTEGER<br />

}<br />

5.4.2.1 End Time Buffer<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

endTimeBuffer OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX Counter<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the time at which the data collection period ended for<br />

the data contained in this row, the second most recently completed previous<br />

sample period. If the clockAvailable data element indicates the presence <strong>of</strong> a<br />

clock, this time shall be expressed in local time as expressed in the<br />

controllerLocalTime data element (see <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03); otherwise, this time<br />

shall be expressed in the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the most recent TSS<br />

initialization.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataEntry.sampleEndTime, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> three.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.2.1.1"<br />

::= { dataBufferEntry 1 }<br />

5.4.2.2 Volume Data Buffer<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

volumeDataBuffer OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Counts per sample period, for the second most recently completed<br />

previous sample period. Counts are expressed as an integer value in the<br />

volumeData data element. The value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent a<br />

missing value. A missing value is reported when the zoneStatusBuffer returned<br />

indicates no other status values apply for the entire sampling period.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataEntry.sampleVolumeData, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> three.<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.2.1.2"<br />

::= { dataBufferEntry 2 }<br />

5.4.2.3 Percent Occupancy Buffer<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

percentOccupancyBuffer OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..1000 | 65535)<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 100<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Percent occupancy over the sample period for the second most<br />

recently completed previous sample period. Occupancy is expressed in tenths <strong>of</strong><br />

a percent, from 0 to 100.0 percent, in the percentOccupancy data element. The<br />

value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent an invalid or missing value. A<br />

missing value is reported when the zoneStatusBuffer is anything other than OK<br />

for the entire sampling period. Values 1001 through 65534 are reserved for<br />

future use.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataEntry.samplePercentOccupancy, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> three.<br />

percent<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.2.1.3"<br />

::= { dataBufferEntry 3 }<br />

5.4.2.4 Speed Data Buffer<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

speedDataBuffer OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..2550 | 65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Arithmetic mean <strong>of</strong> speeds collected over the sample period,<br />

with units <strong>of</strong> 1/10ths <strong>of</strong> km/hr, for the second most recently completed<br />

previous sample period. For a volume <strong>of</strong> zero during the sample period, the<br />

value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent an invalid or missing value. A<br />

missing value is reported when the zoneStatusBuffer is anything other than OK<br />

for the entire sampling period. Values 2551 through 65534 are reserved for<br />

future use.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataEntry.sampleSpeedData, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> three.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> km/hr<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.2.1.4"<br />

-- conversions to English units from SI are required to be done within the<br />

applications<br />

::= { dataBufferEntry 4 }<br />

5.4.2.5 Zone Status Buffer<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneStatusBuffer OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

oK (2),<br />

initializing (3),<br />

noActivity (4),<br />

maxPresence (5),<br />

configurationError (6),<br />

erraticCounts (7),<br />

disabled (8),<br />

overrideActive (9),<br />

sensorFailure (10)<br />

}<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 101<br />

DESCRIPTION "Detailed status returned as result <strong>of</strong> diagnostics, for the<br />

previous sample period, as follows:<br />

Value Meaning<br />

Other - Indicates an error has occurred within the TSS for which<br />

there is no defined definition within this data element,<br />

oK - Indicates no other status values apply,<br />

initializing - Indicates an initialization or diagnostics procedure is<br />

in-progress,<br />

noActivity - Indicates no activity condition,<br />

maxPresence - Indicates max presence condition,<br />

configurationError - Indicates an error within the TSS configuration<br />

setup,<br />

erraticCounts - Indicates erratic counts,<br />

disabled - Indicates that the zone is disabled,<br />

overrideActive - Indicates an override is active,<br />

sensorFailure - Indicates a sensing element failure.<br />

If a condition occurs during the sample period, then that state remains for<br />

the duration <strong>of</strong> that sample period. If multiple conditions occur during a<br />

sample period, the last reported condition, other than OK, is retained.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to report the same data that is<br />

returned using the new object, sampleDataEntry.sampleZoneStatus, with a<br />

sampleZoneClass <strong>of</strong> one and a sampleEntryNum <strong>of</strong> three.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.2.1.5"<br />

::= { dataBufferEntry 5 }<br />

5.4.3 Zone Sequence Table<br />

zoneSequenceTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF ZoneSequenceTableEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing entries for the number <strong>of</strong> historical data<br />

entries and the number <strong>of</strong> classes available for retrieval for each zone. The<br />

maxSensorZones defines the number <strong>of</strong> entries in this table. For each zone,<br />

retrieve the numSampleDataEntries available and the sensorZoneClass for those<br />

historical data entries, then retrieve the appropriate data samples from the<br />

sampleDataTable.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.3"<br />

::= { tssDataCollection 3 }<br />

zoneSequenceTableEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX ZoneSequenceTableEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing the number <strong>of</strong> historical data entries and the<br />

number <strong>of</strong> classes within each historical data entry for each zone. The<br />

maxSensorZones table defines the number <strong>of</strong> entries in this table."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { zoneSequenceTable 1 }<br />

ZoneSequenceTableEntry::= SEQUENCE {<br />

numSampleDataEntries INTEGER,<br />

numSensorZoneClass INTEGER<br />

}<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 102<br />

5.4.3.1 Number <strong>of</strong> Sample Data Entries<br />

numSampleDataEntries OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..5)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The number <strong>of</strong> historical data entries in the sampleDataTable for<br />

a particular zone.<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.3.1.1"<br />

::= { zoneSequenceTableEntry 1 }<br />

5.4.3.2 Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zone Class<br />

numSensorZoneClass OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is the number <strong>of</strong> classes currently supported for each<br />

historical data entry for a particular zone.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.3.1.2"<br />

::= { zoneSequenceTableEntry 2 }<br />

5.4.4 Sample Data Table<br />

sampleDataTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SampleDataEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing the historical sample period data. The number<br />

<strong>of</strong> rows in this table is equal to the maxSensorZones data element multiplied<br />

by the maxSampleDataEntries data element. Table rows are set by the<br />

manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

To retrieve all historical data entries for a zone, the last (oldest) entry<br />

should be retrieved by using numSampleDataEntries and retrieving class one (1)<br />

through numSensorZoneClass first. Class 1 is an aggregation <strong>of</strong> the data from<br />

all <strong>of</strong> the other classes (if any exist). All <strong>of</strong> the class data for a<br />

particular numSampleDataEntries has the same sequenceNumber. Once these<br />

entries are retrieved, the other entries sequence numbers denote the correct<br />

order <strong>of</strong> the samples. Sequence number is used rather than end date as the<br />

system clock may have been reset between data samples.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4"<br />

::= { tssDataCollection 4 }<br />

sampleDataEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SampleDataEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table for data collection parameters."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber, sampleEntryNum, sampleZoneClass }<br />

::= { sampleDataTable 1 }<br />

SampleDataEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 103<br />

sampleEntryNum<br />

INTEGER,<br />

sampleZoneClass<br />

INTEGER,<br />

sampleEndTime<br />

Counter,<br />

sampleVolumeData INTEGER,<br />

samplePercentOccupancy INTEGER,<br />

sampleSpeedData<br />

INTEGER,<br />

sampleZoneStatus INTEGER,<br />

sampleSequenceNumber INTEGER<br />

}<br />

5.4.4.1 Sample Entry Number<br />

sampleEntryNum OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..5)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This identifies which historical sampling period that data is<br />

being requested from. 1 being the sampling period currently in-progress. 2<br />

being the most recently completed sampling period.<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.1"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 1 }<br />

5.4.4.2 Sample Zone Class<br />

sampleZoneClass OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This identifies the class <strong>of</strong> the sensor zone from which<br />

historical sampling period data is being requested. Class 1 retrieves an<br />

aggregate <strong>of</strong> the data from all classes within the requested historical data<br />

entry.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.2"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 2 }<br />

5.4.4.3 Sample End Time<br />

sampleEndTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX Counter<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Indicates the time at which the data collection period ended for<br />

the data contained in this row. If the clockAvailable data element indicates<br />

the presence <strong>of</strong> a clock, this time shall be expressed in local time as<br />

expressed in the controllerLocalTime data element (see <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03);<br />

otherwise, this time shall be expressed in the number <strong>of</strong> seconds since the<br />

most recent TSS initialization.<br />

seconds<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.3"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 3 }<br />

5.4.4.4 Sample Volume Data<br />

sampleVolumeData OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 104<br />

" Counts per sample period. Counts are expressed as an integer<br />

value in the sampleVolumeData data element. For a virtual zone (one created<br />

using any AND Boolean functions), volume is the number <strong>of</strong> times that the<br />

output for the zone was activated. For a virtual zone (one created using only<br />

OR Boolean functions), volume is the additive total <strong>of</strong> the volumes <strong>of</strong> all <strong>of</strong><br />

the zones that make up the virtual zone. The value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned<br />

to represent a missing value. A missing value is reported when the zoneStatus<br />

is anything other than OK for the entire sampling period.<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.4"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 4 }<br />

5.4.4.5 Sample Percent Occupancy<br />

samplePercentOccupancy OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..1000 | 65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Percent occupancy over the sample period. Occupancy is expressed<br />

in tenths <strong>of</strong> a percent, from 0 to 100.0 percent, in the samplePercentOccupancy<br />

data element. For a virtual zone (one created using AND and/or OR Boolean<br />

functions), the percent <strong>of</strong> time that the output for the zone was activated<br />

shall be returned. The value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent an<br />

invalid or missing value. A missing value is reported when the zoneStatus is<br />

anything other than OK for the entire sampling period. Values 1001 through<br />

65534 are reserved for future use.<br />

percent<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.5"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 5 }<br />

5.4.4.6 Sample Speed Data<br />

sampleSpeedData OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..2550 | 65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Arithmetic mean <strong>of</strong> speeds collected over the sample period with<br />

units <strong>of</strong> 1/10ths <strong>of</strong> km/h. For a virtual zone (one created using AND and/or OR<br />

Boolean functions), the value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned as it is not straight<br />

forward to calculate speed from logically combined zones. For a volume <strong>of</strong> zero<br />

during the sample period, the value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent an<br />

invalid or missing value. A missing value is reported when the zoneStatus<br />

returned indicates no other status values apply for the entire sampling<br />

period. Values 2551 through 65534 are reserved for future use.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> km/h<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.6"<br />

-- conversion to English units must be done within the application<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 6 }<br />

5.4.4.7 Sample Zone Status<br />

sampleZoneStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

oK (2),<br />

initializing (3),<br />

noActivity (4),<br />

maxPresence (5),<br />

configurationError (6),<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 105<br />

erraticCounts (7),<br />

disabled (8),<br />

overrideActive (9),<br />

sensorFailure (10),<br />

inputDataIntegrity (11),<br />

poorContrast (12),<br />

detectionAutoSuspended (13),<br />

pairedZoneFault (14) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Detailed status returned as result <strong>of</strong> diagnostics, as follows:<br />

Value Meaning<br />

other(1) - Indicates an error has occurred within the TSS for which<br />

there is no defined definition within this data element,<br />

oK(2) - Indicates no other status values apply,<br />

initializing(3) - Indicates an initialization or diagnostics procedure<br />

is in-progress,<br />

noActivity(4) - Indicates no activity condition,<br />

maxPresence(5) - Indicates max presence condition,<br />

configurationError(6) - Indicates an error within the TSS<br />

configuration setup,<br />

erraticCounts(7 )- Indicates erratic counts,<br />

disabled(8) - Indicates that the zone is disabled,<br />

overrideActive(9) - Indicates an override is active,<br />

sensorFailure(10) - Indicates a sensing element failure,<br />

inputDataIntegrity(11) - indicates input values are not sufficient to<br />

determine detector data accurately (e.g., bad communications, invalid<br />

video for machine vision),<br />

poorContrast(12) - Indicates insufficient contrast error condition,<br />

detectionAutoSuspended(13) - Indicates that the detection zone was<br />

automatically disabled by the TSS (e.g., camera is on a PTZ and<br />

was moved),<br />

pairedZoneFault(14) - Indicates that there was no problem with this<br />

zone, but a zone that it is paired with had a fault. This may affect<br />

the accuracy <strong>of</strong> data reported by this zone.<br />

If a condition occurs during the sample period, then that state remains for<br />

the duration <strong>of</strong> that sample period. If multiple conditions occur during a<br />

sample period, the last reported condition, other than OK, is retained.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.7"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 7 }<br />

5.4.4.8 Sample Sequence Number<br />

sampleSequenceNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The data samples sequence number, used to determine the<br />

appropriate order <strong>of</strong> samples for a particular zone. All data from the same<br />

sampling period have the same historical sequence number (all classes from the<br />

same period have the same sequence number).<br />

count<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.4.1.8"<br />

::= { sampleDataEntry 8 }<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 106<br />

5.4.5 Zone Class Table<br />

zoneClassTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF ZoneClassTableEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is a table that allows the TSS to return a class label for<br />

a particular class <strong>of</strong> a particular zone. These are most likely set by the<br />

manufacturer; however the manufacturer may allow the user to modify these<br />

through means outside <strong>of</strong> this protocol.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.5"<br />

::= { tssDataCollection 5 }<br />

zoneClassTableEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX ZoneClassTableEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Table containing entries for the class labels for each zone."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber, sampleZoneClass }<br />

::= { zoneClassTable 1 }<br />

ZoneClassTableEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

zoneClassLabel OCTET STRING<br />

}<br />

5.4.5.1 Zone Class Label<br />

zoneClassLabel OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..255))<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The label assigned to a particular class number to aid in<br />

identifying the data contained within the class.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.3.5.1.1"<br />

::= { zoneClassTableEntry 1 }<br />

5.5 INDUCTIVE LOOP DETECTOR OBJECTS<br />

tssInductiveLoop OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { tss 4 }<br />

-- This node contains the configuration objects specific to inductive loop<br />

-- detectors.<br />

-- These objects set up physical parameters on the detector that are<br />

-- controlled on a per output basis.<br />

-- These objects are only valid for the zones that map directly to an output<br />

-- on the detector.<br />

-- Zone 1 maps to output 1 and Zone 2 maps to output 2 on a two-channel<br />

-- sensor unit and Zone 3 maps to output 3, and Zone 4 maps to output 4 on a<br />

-- four-channel sensor unit.<br />

-- For inductive loop detectors, the term "channel" is <strong>of</strong>ten used to refer to<br />

-- an "output".<br />

5.5.1 Loop System Setup Table<br />

loopSensorSetupTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF LoopSensorSetupEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 107<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This table contains inductive loop detector sensor zone<br />

parameters. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table does not exceed maxSensorZones.<br />

This table contains the configuration objects specific to inductive loop<br />

detectors. These objects set up physical parameters on the detector that are<br />

controlled on a per output basis. A zone maps directly to an output on an<br />

inductive loop detector - Zone 1 maps to output 1, Zone 2 maps to output 2,<br />

and, on a four-channle sensor unit Zone 3 maps to output 3 and Zone 4 maps to<br />

output 4. Virtual zones may be supported once all physical outputs have had<br />

sensor zones mapped to them. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row<br />

creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.1"<br />

::= { tssInductiveLoop 1 }<br />

loopSensorSetupEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX LoopSensorSetupEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Row in table that contains inductive loop detector sensor zone<br />

parameters. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table does not exceed maxSensorZones or<br />

maxOutputNumber, whichever is greater. Table rows are set by the manufacturer,<br />

and row creation/deletion is not supported."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { loopSensorSetupTable 1 }<br />

LoopSensorSetupEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

zoneSensitivityMode INTEGER,<br />

zoneSensitivity<br />

OCTET STRING,<br />

zoneFrequencyRange OCTET STRING,<br />

sensorZoneLoopLayout INTEGER<br />

}<br />

5.5.1.1 Zone Sensitivity Mode<br />

zoneSensitivityMode OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

deltaL (1),<br />

deltaLOverSqrtL (2),<br />

deltaLOverL (3) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Sensitivity mode in use (3=∆L/L, 2=∆L/√L, 1=∆L). This is a<br />

characteristic <strong>of</strong> the loop detector being used.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.1.1.1"<br />

::= { loopSensorSetupEntry 1 }<br />

5.5.1.2 Zone Sensitivity<br />

zoneSensitivity OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(2))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This bit-mapped object allows the setting and reading <strong>of</strong> the<br />

sensitivity for the zone as follows:<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 108<br />

<br />

bit 3,bit 2,bit1,bit 0 Meaning<br />

0000 Zone OFF (Disabled) (LSB)<br />

0001 Detect ∆L = 512 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0.64%<br />

0010 Detect ∆L = 256 nanoHhenries or ∆L/L = 0.32%<br />

0011 Detect ∆L = 128 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0.16%<br />

0100 Detect ∆L = 64 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0.08%<br />

0101 Detect ∆L = 32 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0.04%<br />

0110 Detect ∆L = 16 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0.02%<br />

0111 Detect ∆L = 8 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0.01%<br />

or, if bit 15=1 Detect ∆L = 0 to 32,767 nanoHenries or ∆L/L = 0 to<br />

32.767% (MSB)<br />

These sensitivity definitions are equal with a loop inductance <strong>of</strong> 80<br />

microHenries. A detector need not support all <strong>of</strong> these settings. However, the<br />

sensitivities it does support are required to conform with these definitions,<br />

e.g. a sensitivity setting <strong>of</strong> 3 is always 128 nanoHenries or 0.16% with an 80<br />

microhenry loop. If bit 15=1, bit 0 – bit 14 contain the sensitivity in<br />

nanoHenries or one-thousands <strong>of</strong> a percent, e.g. 3650 is 3.650%. A value <strong>of</strong><br />

65535 shall be returned to represent invalid data or not a physical zone.<br />

Values <strong>of</strong> 8 through 32767 are reserved.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.1.1.2"<br />

::= { loopSensorSetupEntry 2 }<br />

5.5.1.3 Zone Frequency Range<br />

zoneFrequencyRange OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(1))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Allows the setting and reading <strong>of</strong> the frequency range as<br />

follows:<br />

<br />

bit 2, bit 1, bit 0<br />

Meaning<br />

000 Frequency Range 0 (lowest frequency) (LSB)<br />

001 Frequency Range 1<br />

010 Frequency Range 2<br />

011 Frequency Range 3 (highest frequency for 4 freq. unit)<br />

(MSB)<br />

As the frequency number increases the operation frequency shall increase. The<br />

loop frequency at the lowest frequency setting shall be less than 88% <strong>of</strong> the<br />

loop frequency at the highest frequency setting. Bit 3 can be used to allow a<br />

unit to support 8 frequency ranges instead <strong>of</strong> the four. A value <strong>of</strong> 255 shall<br />

be returned to represent invalid data or not a physical zone. Values <strong>of</strong> 8<br />

through 254 are reserved.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.1.1.3"<br />

::= { loopSensorSetupEntry 3 }<br />

5.5.1.4 Sensor Zone Loop Layout<br />

sensorZoneLoopLayout OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

oneSixBySixLoopOneLane (2),<br />

twoSixBySixLoopsOneLane (3),<br />

threeSixBySixLoopsOneLane (4),<br />

fourSixBySixLoopsOneLane (5),<br />

oneLongLoopOneLane (6),<br />

oneSixBySixLoopMultipleLanes (7) }<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 109<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The zone configuration provides for standardized sensor loop<br />

layouts typically used in roadway applications.<br />

other(1) - Used for special loop configurations and layouts.<br />

oneSixBySixLoopOneLane(2) - Used when there in one six-foot by sixfoot<br />

loop in one travel lane.<br />

twoSixBySixLoopsOneLane(3) - Used when there are two six-foot by sixfoot<br />

loops in one travel lane.<br />

threeSixBySixLoopsOneLane(4) - Used when there are three six-foot by<br />

six-foot loops in one travel lane.<br />

fourSixBySixLoopsOneLane(5) - Used when there are four six-foot by sixfoot<br />

loops in one travel lane.<br />

oneLongLoopOneLane(6) - Used when there is one loop in one travel<br />

lane that exceeds six-feet in length.<br />

oneSixBySixLoopMultipleLanes(7) - Used when there is one six-foot by<br />

six-foot loop in each <strong>of</strong> more than one travel lane.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.1.1.4"<br />

::= { loopSensorSetupEntry 4 }<br />

5.5.2 Loop Output Conditioning Table<br />

--This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

loopOutputConditioningTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF LoopOutputConditioningEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Each table row contains objects for configuring inductive loop<br />

detector sensor zone outputs. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table does not exceed<br />

maxSensorZones. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row<br />

creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

If this object is supported, it must use the same data that will be used by<br />

the new object outputConditioningTable.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2"<br />

::= { tssInductiveLoop 2 }<br />

loopOutputConditioningEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX LoopOutputConditioningEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Each table row contains inductive loop detector sensor zone<br />

output conditioning parameters."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningTable 1 }<br />

LoopOutputConditioningEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

zoneOutputMode<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneMaxPresenceTime INTEGER,<br />

zoneOutputDelayTime INTEGER,<br />

zoneOutputExtendTime INTEGER,<br />

zoneOutputExtendEnable OCTET STRING,<br />

zoneOutputDelayEnable OCTET STRING<br />

}<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 110<br />

5.5.2.1 Zone Output Mode<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneOutputMode OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

other (1),<br />

pulse (2),<br />

presence (3) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This object sets the length <strong>of</strong> the output during a detect<br />

condition. These detect outputs are described as follows:<br />

Other - an output mode other than that defined in this standard<br />

Pulse - a pulse <strong>of</strong> 125ms (±25ms) is output when a vehicle is<br />

detected.<br />

Presence - the output lasts the duration <strong>of</strong> a detect condition or<br />

until the detector tunes out the detect signal.<br />

A value <strong>of</strong> 255 shall be returned to represent invalid data.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to use the same data that is used<br />

by the new object outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputMode.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2.1.1"<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningEntry 1 }<br />

5.5.2.2 Zone Max Presence Feature Time<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneMaxPresenceTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This object sets the maximum time that the zone holds presence<br />

before retuning. Values <strong>of</strong> 1 to 65534 seconds are available. A value <strong>of</strong> 0<br />

disables this timer and prevents a sensor zone occupancy from being tuned out<br />

at the end <strong>of</strong> a specific time. A value <strong>of</strong> 65,535 represents invalid data.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to use the same data that is used<br />

by the new object outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime.<br />

second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2.1.2"<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningEntry 2 }<br />

5.5.2.3 Zone Output Delay Time<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneOutputDelayTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The output for the zone is delayed from start <strong>of</strong> sensor zone<br />

occupancy by the time specified (tenths <strong>of</strong> a second: 00.0 to 6553.5 sec). For<br />

the output to actually switch, the sensor zone occupancy is required to be<br />

continuous and still be present at the end <strong>of</strong> the delay time.<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to use the same data that is used<br />

by the new object outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputDelayTime.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> a second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2.1.3"<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 111<br />

REFERENCE<br />

"NEMA TS2 Clause 3.5.5.5.4.c and 6.5.2.24.1"<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningEntry 3 }<br />

5.5.2.4 Zone Output Extend Time<br />

-- This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneOutputExtendTime OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The output for the zone is extended, after the end <strong>of</strong> the period<br />

in which the sensor zone is occupied, by the amount <strong>of</strong> time specified (tenths<br />

<strong>of</strong> a second: 00.0 to 6553.5 sec).<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to use the same data that is used<br />

by the new object outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputExtendTime.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> a second<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2.1.4"<br />

REFERENCE<br />

"NEMA TS2 Clause 3.5.5.5.4.d and 6.5.2.24.2"<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningEntry 4 }<br />

5.5.2.5 Zone Output Extend Enable<br />

--This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneOutputExtendEnable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(1))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below to enable and disable the<br />

extend time for the sensor zone output, as follows:<br />

<br />

bit 7 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 1 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone (MSB),<br />

bit 6 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 2 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone,<br />

bit 5 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 3 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone,<br />

bit 4 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 4 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone,<br />

bit 3 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 1 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone (MSB),<br />

bit 2 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 2 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone,<br />

bit 1 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 3 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone,<br />

bit 0 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 4 Arming Pin to enable<br />

extend time for the zone (LSB).<br />

Extend time is always enabled for the zone if all bits are zero (0).<br />

If this object is supported, it must use the same data that will be used by<br />

the new objects outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputExtendMode and<br />

outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables to the extent possible.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2.1.5"<br />

REFERENCE<br />

"NEMA TS2 Clause 6.5.2.8.7, 6.5.2.24 and 6.5.2.25.6"<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningEntry 5 }<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 112<br />

5.5.2.6 Zone Output Delay Enabled<br />

--This object has been deprecated. See Annex D for more information.<br />

zoneOutputDelayEnable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(1))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS deprecated<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value as defined below to enable and disable the<br />

delay time for the sensor zone output, as follows:<br />

<br />

bit 7 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 1 Arming Pin to enable<br />

delay time for the zone (MSB),<br />

bit 6 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 2 Arming Pin to enable<br />

delay time for the zone,<br />

bit 5 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 3 Arming Pin to enable<br />

delay time for the zone,<br />

bit 4 0 = NO, 1 = YES HIGH on output 4 Arming Pin to enable<br />

delay time for the zone,<br />

bit 3 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 1 Arming Pin to enable delay<br />

time for the zone (MSB),<br />

bit 2 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 2 Arming Pin to enable delay<br />

time for the zone,<br />

bit 1 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 3 Arming Pin to enable delay<br />

time for the zone,<br />

bit 0 0 = NO, 1 = YES LOW on output 4 Arming Pin to enable delay<br />

time for the zone,<br />

Delay time is always enabled for the zone if all bits are zero (0).<br />

If this object is supported, it is required to use the same data that is used<br />

by the new objects outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputDelayMode and<br />

outputConditioningEntry.sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables to the extent possible.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.2.1.6"<br />

REFERENCE<br />

"NEMA TS2 Clause 6.5.2.8.7, 6.5.2.24 and 6.5.2.25.6"<br />

::= { loopOutputConditioningEntry 6 }<br />

5.5.3 Loop System Status Table<br />

loopSystemStatusTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF LoopSystemStatusEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This table contains inductive loop detector sensor zone status<br />

parameters. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table does not exceed maxSensorZones.<br />

This table contains instantaneous zone status objects specific to inductive<br />

loop detectors. The zoneDetectStatus object may be used by external systems<br />

for doing detailed traffic analysis. A zone maps directly to an output on an<br />

inductive loop detector - Zones 1 maps to output 1, Zone 2 maps to output 2,<br />

and, on a four output inductive loop detector, Zone 3 maps to output 3 and<br />

Zone 4 maps to output 4. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row<br />

creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3"<br />

::= { tssInductiveLoop 3 }<br />

loopSystemStatusEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX LoopSystemStatusEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 113<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Rows in this table contain inductive loop detector sensor zone<br />

status parameters. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table does not exceed<br />

maxSensorZones. Table rows are set by the manufacturer, and row<br />

creation/deletion is not supported."<br />

INDEX { sensorZoneNumber }<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusTable 1 }<br />

LoopSystemStatusEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

zoneInductance<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneFrequency<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneInductanceChange<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneFaultHistory<br />

BITMAP8,<br />

zoneFaultCount<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zonePercentInductanceChange INTEGER<br />

}<br />

5.5.3.1 Zone Inductance<br />

zoneInductance OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The detector unit calculates the inductance <strong>of</strong> the loop attached<br />

to the zone. The resolution is in tenths <strong>of</strong> a microHenry. For example, 852.4<br />

microHenries is represented as 8524. Resolution does not imply accuracy, refer<br />

to manufacturers' data sheet. A value <strong>of</strong> 65535 shall be returned to represent<br />

invalid data or not a physical zone.<br />

tenths <strong>of</strong> a microHenry<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3.1.1"<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusEntry 1 }<br />

5.5.3.2 Zone Frequency<br />

zoneFrequency OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..16777216)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is the frequency <strong>of</strong> the inductive loop attached to the<br />

zone. The frequency resolution is one-tenth hertz. For example, 53240 Hz is<br />

represented as 532400. Resolution does not imply accuracy, refer to<br />

manufacturers' data sheet. A value <strong>of</strong> 16777216 shall be returned to represent<br />

invalid data or not a physical zone.<br />

one-tenth Hertz<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3.1.2"<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusEntry 2 }<br />

5.5.3.3 Zone Inductance Change<br />

zoneInductanceChange OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..8388608)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The maximum inductance change seen since the last start <strong>of</strong><br />

sensor zone occupancy is returned. The resolution is to one nanoHenry.<br />

Resolution does not imply accuracy.<br />

nanoHenry<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 114<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3.1.3"<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusEntry 3 }<br />

5.5.3.4 Zone Fault History<br />

zoneFaultHistory OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP8<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A bit-mapped value representing the history <strong>of</strong> faults in Zone<br />

since the last unit reset.<br />

<br />

bit 7 0 = NO, 1 = YES To indicate that a current fault exists<br />

on the loop connected to the zone (MSB);<br />

bit 6 0 = NO, 1 = YES To indicate that the loop connected to the<br />

zone is open or this was the last fault.<br />

(May be also be called a Maximum Presence<br />

fault by external units.);<br />

bit 5 0 = NO, 1 = YES To indicate that the loop connected to the<br />

zone is shorted or this was the last<br />

fault. (May also be called a No Activity<br />

fault by external units.);<br />

bit 4 0 = NO, 1 = YES To indicate that the loop inductance <strong>of</strong><br />

the loop connected to the zone is<br />

currently ≥ ±25% <strong>of</strong> reference or this was<br />

the last fault. (May also be called a<br />

Erratic Count fault by external units.);<br />

bits 3..1<br />

Reserved;<br />

bit 0 0 = NO, 1 = YES To indicate that data for this value is<br />

invalid data or this is not a physical<br />

zone (LSB).<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3.1.4"<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusEntry 4 }<br />

5.5.3.5 Zone Fault Count<br />

zoneFaultCount OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Number <strong>of</strong> faults in the zone since the last unit reset. These<br />

faults include open circuit; short circuit and ±25% drift faults. The fault<br />

count may also include faults other than those defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02. The<br />

count after 255 is 255.<br />

fault<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3.1.5"<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusEntry 5 }<br />

5.5.3.6 Zone Percent Inductance Change<br />

zonePercentInductanceChange OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..100000)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The maximum inductance change seen since the last start <strong>of</strong><br />

sensor zone occupancy is returned. The resolution is to one one-thousandth <strong>of</strong><br />

a percent. Resolution does not imply accuracy. For example a change <strong>of</strong> 0.1<br />

percent would be represented as 100.<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 115<br />

one one-thousandth <strong>of</strong> a percent<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.4.3.1.3"<br />

::= { loopSystemStatusEntry 6 }<br />

5.6 MACHINE VISION OBJECTS<br />

tssMachineVision OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::={tss 5}<br />

-- This node contains the configuration objects specific to machine vision<br />

-- detectors<br />

5.6.1 Maximum Camera Count<br />

maxCameraCount OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is the maximum number <strong>of</strong> machine vision cameras supported<br />

by the system.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.1"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 1 }<br />

5.6.2 Machine Vision Camera Table<br />

machineVisionCameraTable OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF MachineVisionCameraEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This table contains camera parameters. The number <strong>of</strong> rows in<br />

this table does not exceed maxCameraCount. This table contains the<br />

configuration objects specific to machine vision cameras. Table rows are set<br />

by the manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

Static<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 2 }<br />

machineVisionCameraEntry OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX MachineVisionCameraEntry<br />

ACCESS not-accessible<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Row in table that contains machine vision camera parameters. The<br />

number <strong>of</strong> rows in this table does not exceed maxCameraCount. Table rows are<br />

set by the manufacturer, and row creation/deletion is not supported.<br />

"<br />

INDEX { cameraNumber }<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraTable 1 }<br />

MachineVisionCameraEntry ::= SEQUENCE {<br />

cameraNumber<br />

INTEGER,<br />

cameraNameLabel<br />

OCTET STRING,<br />

imageReceptionDiagnostic INTEGER,<br />

cameraDetectionState<br />

INTEGER,<br />

zoneListForCamera<br />

BITMAP256,<br />

baselineImage<br />

INTEGER,<br />

snapshotImage<br />

INTEGER,<br />

cameraImageFormat<br />

BITMAP32<br />

}<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 116<br />

5.6.2.1 Camera Number<br />

cameraNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..255)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The numerical label or number <strong>of</strong> the machine vision camera. This<br />

number shall not exceed the maxCameraCount data element value.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.1"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 1 }<br />

5.6.2.2 Camera Name Label<br />

cameraNameLabel OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE (8..255))<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A text string used to describe the camera name or location. A<br />

camera name shall be a string length <strong>of</strong> less than 255 characters.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.2"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 2 }<br />

5.6.2.3 Image Reception Diagnostic<br />

imageReceptionDiagnostic OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..100)<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Image Reception Diagnostics is a measure <strong>of</strong> the health <strong>of</strong> the<br />

image transition link from the camera to the machine vision processor. A value<br />

<strong>of</strong> 100 means that all <strong>of</strong> the frames are being received and a value <strong>of</strong> 0 means<br />

that frames are not being received. Values between 0 and 100 are manufacturerspecific.<br />

This is used to track and debug transmission errors from the camera<br />

to the machine vision processor.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.3"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 3 }<br />

5.6.2.4 Camera Detection State<br />

cameraDetectionState OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

detectionIsNotDisabled (1),<br />

detectionIsDisabled (2) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" A camera can be enabled/disabled so that it may be used for<br />

other purposes such as surveillance. A disabled camera puts the associated<br />

zones in failsafe mode. If a pole has been hit and the camera is no longer<br />

looking at the traffic this can be used to put all the zones associated with<br />

that camera in failsafe mode. It can also be used for pan-tilt-zoom camera to<br />

disable detection so that the camera may be used for surveillance allowing the<br />

camera to look at areas other than the detection area. Enabling the camera<br />

places all the zones associated with that camera back into their defined<br />

detection mode.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.4"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 4 }<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 117<br />

5.6.2.5 Zone List for Camera<br />

zoneListForCamera OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP256<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This is a bit map where a 1 in a bit position indicates that<br />

zone is with the selected camera. The least significant bit (bit 0) <strong>of</strong> the<br />

first octet (byte) shall represent zone 1 and bit 6 <strong>of</strong> the 32 nd octet (byte)<br />

shall represent zone 255. The most significant bit <strong>of</strong> the 32 nd octet (byte) is<br />

reserved and shall not be set.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.5"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 5 }<br />

5.6.2.6 Baseline Image<br />

baselineImage OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

notSupported (1),<br />

supportedAndAvailable (2),<br />

supportedButNotAvailable (3) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Determines whether the machine vision camera supports a baseline<br />

image and the status <strong>of</strong> that image.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.6"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 6 }<br />

5.6.2.7 Snapshot Image<br />

snapshotImage OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

notSupported (1),<br />

supported (2) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This data element determines whether the machine vision camera<br />

supports a snapshot image.<br />

notSupported(1) - Indicates that the machine vision camera does<br />

not support snapshot images.<br />

supported(2) - Indicates that the machine vision camera supports<br />

snapshot images.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.7"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 7 }<br />

5.6.2.8 Camera Image Formats<br />

cameraImageFormat OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX BITMAP32<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Defines the types <strong>of</strong> image formats that the machine vision<br />

camera supports.<br />

<br />

bit 0 0 = NO, 1 = YES Indicates that the machine vision camera<br />

supports bitmap imagery;<br />

bit 1 0 = NO, 1 = YES Indicates that the machine vision camera<br />

supports JPEG imagery;<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 118<br />

bits 2..31<br />

Reserved.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.2.1.8"<br />

::= { machineVisionCameraEntry 8 }<br />

5.6.3 Image Zone Number<br />

imageZoneNumber OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (0..255)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" The numerical label or number representing the sensor zone<br />

number that is associated with the image. A value <strong>of</strong> zero (0) indicates that<br />

no sensor zone number is selected. When read, this data element returns the<br />

last value written.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.3"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 3 }<br />

5.6.4 Image Type<br />

imageType OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

snapshot (1),<br />

baseline (2) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS mandatory<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This data element set the type <strong>of</strong> image to generate:<br />

Snapshot(1) - Snapshot indicates to capture a current image to<br />

transmit;<br />

Baseline(2) - Baseline indicates to use the baseline image used<br />

to set up the system for transfer.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.4"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 4 }<br />

5.6.5 Image Overlay Type<br />

imageOverlayType OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

none (1),<br />

thisZone (2),<br />

allZones (3),<br />

defaultOverlay (4) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This data element sets the type <strong>of</strong> image overlay to generate:<br />

none(1) - No overlay is generated in to the image;<br />

thisZone(2) - Indicates that an overlay is generated in the<br />

image indicating the location <strong>of</strong> this zone. The overlay specifics<br />

are manufacturer dependent;<br />

allZones(3) - Indicates that an overlay is generated in the<br />

image indicating the location <strong>of</strong> all zones associated with the<br />

camera. The overlay specifics are manufacturer dependent;<br />

defaultOverlay(4) - Indicates the manufacturer generates its<br />

default overlay in to the image.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.5"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 5 }<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 119<br />

5.6.6 Image Format<br />

imageFormat OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

bitmap (1),<br />

jpeg (2) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Identifies what format to return the machine vision camera image<br />

in.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.6"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 6 }<br />

5.6.7 Image Quality<br />

imageQuality OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER (1..100)<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" This data element is used to select the image quality. The<br />

meaning varies based on the Image Format. A value <strong>of</strong> 100 selects the highest<br />

quality available. A value <strong>of</strong> 1 selects the lowest quality available. Lower<br />

quality may mean smaller more compressed images. Some image formats do not<br />

support variable image quality so the value is ignored. If a manufacturer<br />

supports only two image qualities for a specific image format then values 1 to<br />

50 should select the lower quality while values 51 to 100 should select the<br />

higher quality.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.7"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 7 }<br />

5.6.8 Build Image<br />

buildImageCmd OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

buildImage (1),<br />

cancelBuildInProgress (2) }<br />

ACCESS read-write<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Writing the value buildImage to this data element commands the<br />

sensor to build an image based on the preceding parameters. A read <strong>of</strong> this<br />

data element always returns the last written. Values for this command are:<br />

buildImage(1) - This command shall cause the unit to build an<br />

image that can be read.<br />

cancelBuildInProgress(2) - This command shall cause the unit to<br />

cancel the current building process.<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.8"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 8 }<br />

5.6.9 Build Image Status<br />

buildImageStatus OBJECT-TYPE<br />

SYNTAX INTEGER {<br />

noImage (1),<br />

buildingImage (2),<br />

imageReady (3),<br />

genericError (4),<br />

invalidParameter (5),<br />

noCameraForZone (6),<br />

multipleCamerasForZone (7),<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 120<br />

imageReceiveError (8),<br />

buildPending (9) }<br />

ACCESS read-only<br />

STATUS optional<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

" Reading the value buildImageStatus from this data element yields<br />

the status <strong>of</strong> the current image to be read:<br />

noImage(1) - No Image is available for reading. This is the<br />

initial state if the buildImageCmd command has not been issued;<br />

buildingImage(2) - The sensor is in the progress <strong>of</strong> building the<br />

image. It is not ready yet;<br />

imageReady(3) - The image is ready for transfer. The last build<br />

command completed successfully;<br />

genericError(4) - An error occurred generating an image and<br />

there is not a more descriptive status code available to describe<br />

it;<br />

invalidParameter(5) - One <strong>of</strong> the Image Setup Data parameters is<br />

invalid;<br />

noCameraForZone(6) - The zone selected does not have a camera<br />

associated with it;<br />

multipleCamerasForZone(7) - There is more than one camera<br />

associated with the zone. To build an image you must select a<br />

zone with one and only one camera;<br />

imageReceiveError(8) - The sensor is having trouble receiving an<br />

image from its camera. This could be bad sync or other<br />

transmission problems;<br />

buildPending(9) - The sensor can not begin the requested build<br />

at this time. The build begins when the blocking condition<br />

was ended. This can occur if the current image is in use (e.g.,<br />

being transferred).<br />

1.3.6.1.4.1.1206.4.2.4.5.9"<br />

::= { tssMachineVision 9 }<br />

END<br />

Copy Per MIB Distribution Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 121<br />

Annex A<br />

REQUIREMENTS TRACEABILITY MATRIX (RTM)<br />

NORMATIVE<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.3 Operational Environment Requirements<br />

3.3.1 Support Live Data<br />

3.3.1.1 Retrieve Data<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

3.3.1.2 Deliver Data<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

3.3.1.3 Data Retrieval and Data Delivery Action Performance<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

4.2.2 Generic SNMP Get-Next Interface<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

3.3.2 Support Batched Data<br />

3.3.2.1 Retrieve Historical Sample Data<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.3 sampleEndTime<br />

5.4.4.4 sampleVolumeData<br />

5.4.4.5 samplePercentOccupancy<br />

5.4.4.6 sampleSpeedData<br />

5.4.4.7 sampleZoneStatus<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 122<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4 Data Exchange Requirements<br />

3.4.1 Manage the TSS Configuration<br />

3.4.1.1 Identify TSS<br />

3.4.1.1.1 Determine Sensor Technology<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

3.4.1.1.2 Determine Manufacturer<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.2.3.3 moduleMake<br />

3.4.1.1.3 Determine Model<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.2.3.4 moduleModel<br />

3.4.1.1.4 Determine Firmware Version<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.2.3.5 moduleVersion<br />

3.4.1.1.5 Determine Hardware Version<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.2.3.5 moduleVersion<br />

3.4.1.1.6 Determine Protocol Version<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.2.3.5 moduleVersion<br />

3.4.1.1.7 Determine <strong>Standard</strong>s Revision Version<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.2.3.5 moduleVersion<br />

3.4.1.2 Determine TSS Capabilities<br />

3.4.1.2.1 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zones<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 123<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.2.2 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Historical Data Entries per Sensor Zone<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.8 maxSampleDataEntries<br />

3.4.1.2.3 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Outputs<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.3.1 maxOutputNumber<br />

3.4.1.2.4 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Output Groups<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.3.3 maxOutputGroups<br />

3.4.1.2.5 Determine Type <strong>of</strong> Occupancy Used<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.3 sensorSystemOccupancyType<br />

3.4.1.2.6 Determine Availability <strong>of</strong> a Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.6 clockAvailable<br />

3.4.1.2.7 Determine if Real Time Clock (RTC) Supports Daylight Saving Time (DST)<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

1201:2005 – 2.4.2 global DaylightSaving<br />

3.4.1.2.8 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Classes<br />

4.3.3.1 Retrieve Sensor Zone Sequence Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

3.4.1.2.9 Determine Maximum Number <strong>of</strong> Characters for Labels<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.9 maxNumberOfCharacters<br />

3.4.1.2.10 Determine Optional Features<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 124<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.3 Control the TSS<br />

3.4.1.3.1 Restart the TSS<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.2 Reinitialize User Settings<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.3 Restore Factory Defaults<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.4 Retune<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.5 Resynchronize Sampling Periods<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.6 Short Diagnostics<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.7 Full Diagnostics<br />

4.3.1.1 Reset and Synchronize the TSS<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 125<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.3.8 Execute Pending Configuration<br />

4.3.1.3 Execute Pending Configuration Change<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.9 Abort Pending Configuration<br />

4.3.1.4 Abort Pending Configuration<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.10 Validate Pending Configuration<br />

4.3.1.5 Validate a Pending Configuration<br />

5.2.1 sensorSystemReset<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.1.3.11 Get External Arming Inputs<br />

4.3.1.9 Retrieve External Arming Inputs<br />

5.2.11 externalArmingInputs<br />

3.4.1.3.12 Set External Arming Inputs<br />

4.3.1.8 Configuring External Arming Inputs<br />

5.2.11 externalArmingInputs<br />

3.4.1.3.13 Set Pending Configuration File Name<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.2.13 pendingConfigurationFileName<br />

3.4.1.3.14 Get Pending Configuration File Name<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.13 pendingConfigurationFileName<br />

3.4.1.4 Manage Real Time Clock (RTC)<br />

3.4.1.4.1 Get Date and Time<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.1 globalTime<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.6 controller<strong>Standard</strong>TImeZone<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 126<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.7 controllerLocalTime<br />

3.4.1.4.2 Get Daylight Saving Time (DST) Mode<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.2 globalDaylightSaving<br />

3.4.1.4.3 Set Date and Time<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.1 globalTime<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.6 controller<strong>Standard</strong>TimeZone<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.7 controllerLocalTime<br />

3.4.1.4.4 Set Daylight Saving Time (DST) Mode<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 Sec. 2.4.2 globalDaylightSaving<br />

3.4.1.5 Manage Sensor Zones<br />

3.4.1.5.1 Get Zone Options<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.2 sensorZoneOptions<br />

3.4.1.5.2 Get Zone Options Status<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.3 sensorZoneOptionsStatus<br />

3.4.1.5.3 Get Zone Sample Period<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.4 sensorZoneSamplePeriod<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 127<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.4 Get Zone Label<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.5 sensorZoneLabel<br />

3.4.1.5.5 Get Zone Boolean AND Zones<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.6 sensorZoneAndOperator<br />

3.4.1.5.6 Get Zone Boolean OR Zones<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.7 sensorZoneOrOperator<br />

3.4.1.5.7 Set Zone Options<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.2 sensorZoneOptions<br />

3.4.1.5.8 Set Zone Sample Period<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.3 sensorZoneOptionsStatus<br />

5.2.5.4 sensorZoneSamplePeriod<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 128<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.9 Set Zone Label<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.5 sensorZoneLabel<br />

3.4.1.5.10 Set Zone Boolean AND Zones<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.6 sensorZoneAndOperator<br />

3.4.1.5.11 Set Zone Boolean OR Zones<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.7 sensorZoneOrOperator<br />

3.4.1.5.12 Get Paired Zone<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.8 sensorZonePairedZone<br />

3.4.1.5.13 Get Paired Zone Options<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.9 sensorZonePairedZoneOptions<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 129<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.14 Get Paired Zone Spacing<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.10 sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing<br />

3.4.1.5.15 Get Speed Correction Factor<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.11 sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor<br />

3.4.1.5.16 Set Paired Zone<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.8 sensorZonePairedZone<br />

3.4.1.5.17 Set Paired Zone Options<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.9 sensorZonePairedZoneOptions<br />

3.4.1.5.18 Set Paired Zone Spacing<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.10 sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 130<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.19 Set Speed Correction Factor<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.11 sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor<br />

3.4.1.5.20 Get Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.12 sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength<br />

3.4.1.5.21 Get Sensor Zone Length<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.13 sensorZoneLength<br />

3.4.1.5.22 Set Sensor Zone Average Vehicle Length<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.12 sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength<br />

3.4.1.5.23 Set Sensor Zone Length<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.13 sensorZoneLength<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 131<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.24 Get Sensor Zone Loop Layout<br />

4.3.4.2 Retrieve Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.4 sensorZoneLoopLayout<br />

3.4.1.5.25 Set Sensor Zone Loop Layout<br />

4.3.4.1 Configure Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.4 sensorZoneLoopLayout<br />

3.4.1.5.26 Set Zone Sensitivity Mode<br />

4.3.4.1 Configure Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.1 zoneSensitivityMode<br />

3.4.1.5.27 Set Zone Sensitivity<br />

4.3.4.1 Configure Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.2 zoneSensitivity<br />

3.4.1.5.28 Set Sensor Zone Frequency Range<br />

4.3.4.1 Configure Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.3 zoneFrequencyRange<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 132<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.29 Get Zone Sensitivity Mode<br />

4.3.4.2 Retrieve Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.1 zoneSensitivityMode<br />

3.4.1.5.30 Get Zone Sensitivity<br />

4.3.4.2 Retrieve Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.2 zoneSensitivity<br />

3.4.1.5.31 Get Sensor Zone Frequency Range<br />

4.3.4.2 Retrieve Loop System Setup Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.1.3 zoneFrequencyRange<br />

3.4.1.5.32 Get Zone Output Mode<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.1 sensorZoneOutputMode<br />

3.4.1.5.33 Get Output Max Presence Time<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.2 sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 133<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.34 Get Output Delay Time<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.3 sensorZoneOutputDelayTime<br />

3.4.1.5.35 Get Output Extension Time<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.6 sensorZoneOutputExtendTime<br />

3.4.1.5.36 Set Zone Output Mode<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.3.12.1 sensorZoneOutputMode<br />

3.4.1.5.37 Set Output Max Presence Time<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.2 sensorZoneMaxPresenceTime<br />

3.4.1.5.38 Set Output Delay Time<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.3 sensorZoneOutputDelayTime<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 134<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.39 Set Output Delay Enables<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.5 sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables<br />

3.4.1.5.40 Set Output Extension Time<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.6 sensorZoneOutputExtendTime<br />

3.4.1.5.41 Set Output Extension Enables<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.8 sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables<br />

3.4.1.5.42 Get Output Delay Mode<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.4 sensorZoneOutputDelayMode<br />

3.4.1.5.43 Set Output Delay Mode<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.4 sensorZoneOutputDelayMode<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 135<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.44 Get Output Extension Mode<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.7 sensorZoneOutputExtendMode<br />

3.4.1.5.45 Set Output Extension Mode<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.7 sensorZoneOutputExtendMode<br />

3.4.1.5.46 Get Zone Output Sequenced<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.9 sensorZoneOutputSequenced<br />

3.4.1.5.47 Set Zone Output Sequenced<br />

4.3.1.10 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.9 sensorZoneOutputSequenced<br />

3.4.1.5.48 Get Output Delay Enables<br />

4.3.1.11 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.5 sensorZoneOutputDelayEnables<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 136<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.49 Get Output Extension Enables<br />

4.3.1.11 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.12.8 sensorZoneOutputExtendEnables<br />

3.4.1.5.50 Get No Activity Fault Time<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.15 sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime<br />

3.4.1.5.51 Get Max Presence Fault Time<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.16 sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime<br />

3.4.1.5.52 Get Erratic Counts Fault Time<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.17 sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime<br />

3.4.1.5.53 Get Erratic Counts Threshold<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.18 sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 137<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.5.54 Set No Activity Fault Time<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.15 sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime<br />

3.4.1.5.55 Set Max Presence Fault Time<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.16 sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime<br />

3.4.1.5.56 Set Erratic Counts Fault Time<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.17 sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime<br />

3.4.1.5.57 Set Erratic Counts Threshold<br />

4.3.1.6 Configure a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.18 sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold<br />

3.4.1.6 Manage Outputs<br />

3.4.1.6.1 Get Output Sensor Zone<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Output Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.2 outputSensorZoneNumber<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 138<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.6.2 Get Output Failsafe Mode<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Output Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.3 outputFailsafeMode<br />

3.4.1.6.3 Get Output Mode Status<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Output Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.4 outputModeStatus<br />

3.4.1.6.4 Get Output Label<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Output Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.5 outputLabel<br />

3.4.1.6.5 Set Output Sensor Zone<br />

4.3.2.1 Configure Output<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.2 outputSensorZoneNumber<br />

3.4.1.6.6 Set Output Failsafe Mode<br />

4.3.2.1 Configure Output<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.3 outputFailsafeMode<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 139<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.6.7 Set Output Label<br />

4.3.2.1 Configure Output<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.5 outputLabel<br />

3.4.1.6.8 Get Output Arming Enables<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.6 outputArmingEnables<br />

3.4.1.6.9 Get Output Arming Mode<br />

4.3.2.2 Retrieve Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.6 outputArmingEnables<br />

3.4.1.6.10 Set Ouput Arming Enables<br />

4.3.2.1 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.6 outputArmingEnables<br />

3.4.1.6.11 Set Ouput Arming Mode<br />

4.3.2.1 Configure Sensor Zone Output Conditioning<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.3.2.1 outputNumber<br />

5.3.2.7 outputArmingEnables<br />

3.4.1.7 Manage Camera<br />

3.4.1.7.1 Set Disable Detection<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.2.4 cameraDetectionState<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 140<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.7.2 Get Disable Detection<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.4 cameraDetectionState<br />

3.4.1.7.3 Set the Build Image Parameter<br />

4.3.5.1 Set Build Image Parameter<br />

5.6.3 imageZoneNumber<br />

5.6.4 imageType<br />

5.6.5 imageOverlayType<br />

5.6.6 imageFormat<br />

5.6.7 imageQuality<br />

5.6.8 buildImageCmd<br />

3.4.1.7.4 Set Cancel Build In-Progress<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.8 buildImageCmd<br />

3.4.1.7.5 Get Baseline Image Status<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.6 baselineImage<br />

3.4.1.7.6 Get Camera Image Formats Supported<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.8 cameraImageFormat<br />

3.4.1.7.7 Set Image Zone Number<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.3 imageZoneNumber<br />

3.4.1.7.8 Get Image Zone Number<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.3 imageZoneNumber<br />

3.4.1.7.9 Set Image Type<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.4 imageType<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 141<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.7.10 Get Image Type<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.4 imageType<br />

3.4.1.7.11 Set Image Overlay Type<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.5 imageOverlayType<br />

3.4.1.7.12 Get Image Overlay Type<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.5 imageOverlayType<br />

3.4.1.7.13 Set Image Quality<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.7 imageQuality<br />

3.4.1.7.14 Get Image Quality<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.7 imageQuality<br />

3.4.1.7.15 Set Camera Image Format<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.6 imageFormat<br />

3.4.1.7.16 Get Camera Image Format<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.6 imageFormat<br />

3.4.1.7.17 Get Camera Name Label<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.2 cameraNameLabel<br />

3.4.1.7.18 Set Camera Name Label<br />

4.2.3 Generic SNMP Set Interface<br />

5.6.2.2 cameraNameLabel<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 142<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.1.7.19 Get Maximum Camera Count<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.1 maxCameraCount<br />

3.4.2 Monitor the Current Status<br />

3.4.2.1 Get System Status<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.2 sensorSystemStatus<br />

3.4.2.2 TSS Sensor Status<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.2.5.14 sensorZoneStatus<br />

3.4.2.2.1 Get Zone Inductance<br />

4.3.4.3 Retrieve Loop System Status<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.3.1 zoneInductance<br />

3.4.2.2.2 Get Zone Frequency<br />

4.3.4.3 Retrieve Loop System Status<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.3.2 zoneFrequency<br />

3.4.2.2.3 Get Zone Inductance Change<br />

4.3.4.3 Retrieve Loop System Status<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.3.3 zoneInductanceChange<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 143<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.2.2.4 Get Zone Fault History<br />

4.3.4.3 Retrieve Loop System Status<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.3.4 zoneFaultHistory<br />

3.4.2.2.5 Get Zone Fault Count<br />

4.3.4.3 Retrieve Loop System Status<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.7 sensorTechnology<br />

5.5.3.5 zoneFaultCount<br />

3.4.2.2.6 Get Zone Status<br />

4.3.1.7 Retrieve a Sensor Zone Configuration<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.2.5.14 sensorZoneStatus<br />

3.4.2.2.7 Get Image Reception Diagnostics<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.3 imageReceptionDiagnostic<br />

3.4.2.2.8 Get Image<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.7 snapshotImage<br />

3.4.2.2.9 Get Zone List for Camera<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.2.5 zoneListForCamera<br />

3.4.2.2.10 Get Zone Percent Inductance Change<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.5.3.6 zonePercentInductanceChange<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 144<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.2.2.11 Get Image Status<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.6.9 buildImageStatus<br />

3.4.2.3 Monitor Output States<br />

3.4.2.3.1 Get Output Group Output State<br />

4.2.1 Generic SNMP Get Interface<br />

5.3.4.1 outputGroupNumber<br />

5.3.4.2 outputGroupOutputState<br />

3.4.3 Collection <strong>of</strong> Sample Data<br />

3.4.3.1 Retrieve Historical Sample Data from TSS<br />

3.4.3.1.1 Get Historical Sample End Time<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

5.4.4.3 sampleEndTime<br />

3.4.3.1.2 Get Historical Sample Volume<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

5.4.4.4 sampleVolumeData<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 145<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.3.1.3 Get Historical Sample Percent Occupancy<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

5.4.4.5 samplePercentOccupancy<br />

3.4.3.1.4 Get Historical Sample Speed<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

5.4.4.6 sampleSpeedData<br />

3.4.3.1.5 Get Historical Sample Zone Status<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

5.4.4.7 sampleZoneStatus<br />

3.4.3.1.6 Get Historical Sequence Number<br />

4.3.3.2 Retrieve Sample Data for a Particular Sensor Zone, Sample Entry, and Zone Class<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

5.4.4.8 sampleSequenceNumber<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 146<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.4.3.1.7 Get Zone Class Label<br />

3.4.3.1.8 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sample Data Entries<br />

3.4.3.1.9 Get Number <strong>of</strong> Sensor Zone Classes<br />

4.3.3.5 Retrieve Sensor Zone Class Labels<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.4.5.1 zoneClassLabel<br />

4.3.3.1 Retrieve Sensor Zone Sequence Parameters<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.4.3.1 numSampleDataEntries<br />

4.3.3.1 Retrieve Sensor Zone Sequence Parameters<br />

3.5 Multi-Version Interoperability (MVI-Backward Compatibility)<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.2.10 functionalCapabilities<br />

5.4.3.2 numSensorZoneClass<br />

3.5.1 Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample Table<br />

3.5.1.1 Get Sample End Time<br />

3.5.1.2 Get Volume<br />

4.3.3.6<br />

4.3.3.6<br />

Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample for a Sensor<br />

Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.1.1 endTime<br />

Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample for a Sensor<br />

Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.1.2 volumeData<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 147<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.5.1.3 Get Percent Occupancy<br />

3.5.1.4 Get Speed<br />

3.5.1.5 Get Zone Status<br />

4.3.3.6<br />

4.3.3.6<br />

Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample for a Sensor<br />

Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.1.3 percentOccupancy<br />

Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample for a Sensor<br />

Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.1.4 speedData<br />

4.3.3.6<br />

Retrieve Most Recent <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>: 2005 (version v01) Conformant Data Sample for a Sensor<br />

Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.1.5 zoneStatus<br />

3.5.2 Retrieve Version v01 Conformant Historical Sample Data Table<br />

3.5.2.1 Get End Time<br />

3.5.2.2 Get Volume<br />

3.5.2.3 Get Percent Occupancy<br />

4.3.3.7 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.2.1 endTimeBuffer<br />

4.3.3.7 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.2.2 volumeDataBuffer<br />

4.3.3.7 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.2.3 percentOccupancyBuffer<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 148<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.5.2.4 Get Speed<br />

4.3.3.7 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.2.4 speedDataBuffer<br />

3.5.2.5 Get Zone Status<br />

4.3.3.7 Retrieve <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) Conformant Historical Sample Data for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.4.2.5 zoneStatusBuffer<br />

3.5.3 Loop Output Conditioning Table<br />

3.5.3.1 Get Output Mode<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.1 zoneOutputMode<br />

3.5.3.2 Get Max Presence Time<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.2 zoneMaxPresenceTime<br />

3.5.3.3 Get Output Delay Time<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.3 zoneOutputDelayTime<br />

3.5.3.4 Get Output Extend Time<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.4 zoneOutputExtendTime<br />

3.5.3.5 Get Output Delay Enable<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.6 zoneOutputDelayEnable<br />

Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice © 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 149<br />

Requirement ID Requirement Dialog ID Dialog Object ID Object<br />

3.5.3.6 Get Output Extend Enable<br />

4.3.1.13 Retrieve Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.5 zoneOutputExtendEnable<br />

3.5.3.7 Set Output Mode<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.1 zoneOutputMode<br />

3.5.3.8 Set Max Presence Time<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.2 zoneMaxPresenceTime<br />

3.5.3.9 Set Output Delay Time<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.3 zoneOutputDelayTime<br />

3.5.3.10 Set Output Extend Time<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.4 zoneOutputExtendTime<br />

3.5.3.11 Set Output Delay Enable<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.6 zoneOutputDelayEnable<br />

3.5.3.12 Set Output Extend Enable<br />

4.3.1.12 Configure Loop Output Conditioning for a Sensor Zone<br />

5.2.4 maxSensorZones<br />

5.5.2.5 zoneOutputExtendEnable<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Copy Per RTM Distribution Notice


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 150<br />

Annex B<br />

OBJECT TREE<br />

Figure 7 provides a graphical representation <strong>of</strong> the Traffic Sensor System Object Tree.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 151<br />

tss (4)<br />

tssSystemSetup (1) tssControl (2)<br />

tssDataCollection<br />

(3)<br />

tssInductiveLoop<br />

(4)<br />

tssMachineVision<br />

(5)<br />

sensorSystemReset<br />

(1)<br />

maxOutputNumber<br />

(1)<br />

dataCollectionTable<br />

(1)<br />

loopSensorSetupTa<br />

ble (1)<br />

maxCameraCount<br />

(1)<br />

sensorSystemStatu<br />

s (2)<br />

outputConfiguration<br />

Table (2)<br />

dataBufferTable (2)<br />

loopOutputConditio<br />

ningTable (2)<br />

machineVisionCam<br />

eraTable (2)<br />

sensorSystemOccu<br />

pancyType (3)<br />

maxOutputGroups<br />

(3)<br />

zoneSequenceTabl<br />

e (3)<br />

loopSystemStatusT<br />

able (3)<br />

imageZoneNumber<br />

(3)<br />

maxSensorZones<br />

(4)<br />

outputGroupTable<br />

(4)<br />

sampleDataTable<br />

(4)<br />

imageType (4)<br />

sensorZoneTable<br />

(5)<br />

zoneClassTable (5)<br />

imageOverlayType<br />

(5)<br />

clockAvailable (6)<br />

imageFormat (6)<br />

sensorTechnology<br />

(7)<br />

imageQuality (7)<br />

maxSampleDataEnt<br />

ries (8)<br />

buildImageCmd (8)<br />

MaxNumberOfChar<br />

acters (9)<br />

buildImageStatus<br />

(9)<br />

functionalCapabilitie<br />

s (10)<br />

externalArmingInput<br />

s (11)<br />

outputConditioningT<br />

able (12)<br />

Diagram Notes:<br />

1) Not all levels <strong>of</strong> the tree are shown.<br />

2) Highlighted data elements have been deprecated.<br />

pendingConfiguratio<br />

nFileName (13)<br />

Figure 7 Object Tree for <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02<br />

©2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 152<br />

Annex C<br />

TEST PROCEDURES<br />

Annex C is a placeholder for test procedures content in a future major version.<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 153<br />

Annex D<br />

DOCUMENTATION OF REVISIONS<br />

Annex D identifies changes that have been made to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 that required the deprecation <strong>of</strong><br />

objects. <strong>NTCIP</strong> makes reasonable efforts to ensure that <strong>NTCIP</strong> standards accommodate multi-version<br />

interoperability (MVI-backward compatibility) to the extent possible. When revisions are required,<br />

problematic objects are deprecated and, in most cases, are replaced with new objects. Annex D identifies<br />

why many <strong>of</strong> these changes have been made. To maintain MVI for legacy implementations, objects with<br />

a STATUS value <strong>of</strong> “deprecated” may require support. When necessary to support legacy<br />

implementations, required support for objects with a STATUS value <strong>of</strong> “deprecated” is indicated using the<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>ile Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) or Protocol Requirements List (PRL).<br />

D.1 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING PROCESS<br />

Major changes have been made to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 to embrace the principles <strong>of</strong> the Systems<br />

Engineering Process (SEP). SEP includes the definition <strong>of</strong> the user needs, functional requirements,<br />

dialogs, and a requirements traceability matrix in addition to the already existing management information<br />

base (MIB). The conformance group definitions and the conformance statement contained in <strong>NTCIP</strong><br />

<strong>1209</strong>:2005 (version v01) were replaced by the Protocol Requirements List (PRL) in Section 3, which<br />

allows a user to specify which functions are to be supported by a TSS.<br />

D.2 GENERAL MIB CHANGES<br />

General edits have been made to the MIB header in <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 to reflect updates to imported MIBs.<br />

All DESCRIPTION fields have been updated to conform to <strong>NTCIP</strong> 8004 v02. Additionally, many<br />

DESCRIPTION fields have received additional clarifications and explanations to remove ambiguities.<br />

and subfields were removed from the DESCRIPTION field.<br />

References to objects defined in <strong>NTCIP</strong> 1201 v03 are now made through the RTM rather than through<br />

comments in the MIB.<br />

Textual conventions BITMAP8, BITMAP16, BITMAP32, BITMAP64, BITMAP96, and BITMAP256 were<br />

used for data elements that were intended to be used as bitmapped data instead <strong>of</strong> OCTET STRING<br />

(SIZE(1)), OCTET STRING (SIZE(2)), OCTET STRING (SIZE(4)), OCTET STRING (SIZE(8)), OCTET<br />

STRING (SIZE(12)), and OCTET STRING (SIZE(32)), respectively. This adds clarity to the use <strong>of</strong> data<br />

elements without affecting their size or compilation.<br />

D.3 DEPRECATED DATA COLLECTION TABLE<br />

The dataCollectionTable data element and its subordinates were deprecated because they did not<br />

adequately support the user need for classes and additional sample periods (minimum <strong>of</strong> four). A new<br />

capability is supported by the combination <strong>of</strong> the zoneSequenceTable and the sampleDataTable, entry<br />

number 2.<br />

D.4 DEPRECATED DATA BUFFER TABLE<br />

The dataBufferTable data element and its subordinates were deprecated because they did not support<br />

classes. "In-progress" data is now supported through the combination <strong>of</strong> the zoneSequenceTable and the<br />

sampleDataTable, entry number 3.<br />

D.5 DEPRECATED LOOP OUTPUT CONDITIONING TABLE<br />

The loopOutputConditioningTable and its subordinates were deprecated because they did not support<br />

use in other sensor technologies. This capability is now in the outputConditioningTable data element.<br />

©2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA Do Not Copy Without Written Permission


<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> <strong>v02.17</strong><br />

Page 154<br />

D.6 ADDED MACHINE VISION DATA ELEMENTS<br />

<strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02 supports general transportation sensing capabilities. It also explicitly provides data<br />

elements to support inductive loop and machine vision technologies (see tssInductiveLoop and<br />

tssMachineVision). Machine vision data elements were added to <strong>NTCIP</strong> <strong>1209</strong> v02.<br />

D.7 ADDITIONAL DATA ELEMENTS<br />

In addition to machine vision, data elements were added to:<br />

a) allow output conditioning on multiple technologies,<br />

b) support classes,<br />

c) support multiple sampling periods,<br />

d) support Arming Inputs, and<br />

e) support fault thresholds.<br />

The following data elements were added to the MIB, and may have subordinate data elements that are<br />

not listed.<br />

a) sensorSystemReset—Added enumerations executePendingConfiguration,<br />

abortPendingConfiguration, validatePendingConfiguration, and noResetInProgress.<br />

b) sensorSystemStatus—Added enumerations pendingConfigurationChange,<br />

validatingPendingConfiguration, DiagError, actvieConfigError, and pendingConfigError.<br />

c) sensorSystemOccupancyType—Added enumeration normalizedPointOccupancy.<br />

d) sensorZoneTable—Added data elements sensorZonePairedZone, sensorZonePairedZoneOptions,<br />

sensorZonePairedZoneSpacing, sensorZoneSpeedCorrectionFactor, sensorZoneAvgVehicleLength,<br />

sensorZoneLength, sensorZoneStatus, sensorZoneNoActivityFaultTime,<br />

sensorZoneMaxPresenceFaultTime, sensorZoneErraticCountsFaultTime, and<br />

sensorZoneErraticCountsThreshold.<br />

e) tssSystemSetup—Added sensorTechology, maxSampleDataEntries, maxNumberOfCharacters,<br />

functionalCapabilities, externalArmingInputs, outputConditioningTable, and<br />

pendingConfigurationFileName.<br />

f) outputConfigurationTable—Added outputArmingEnables and outputArmingMode.<br />

g) tssDataCollection—Added zoneSequenceTable, sampleDataTable, and zoneClassTable.<br />

h) loopSensorSetupTable—Added sensorZoneLoopLayout.<br />

i) loopSystemStatusTable—Added zonePercentInductanceChange.<br />

§<br />

Do Not Copy Without Written Permission<br />

© 2010 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!